Mercedes - S-Class Maybach - Brochure - 2022 - 2022

Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. É22358425117ËÍ 2235842511 Order no. P223 0574 13 Part no. 223 584 25 11 Edition B-2023 S-Class Maybach Digital – in the vehicle S-Class Maybach Operator's Manual Front passenger air bag warning & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team ©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Air bag warning sticker for USA and Canada As at 04.04.22 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before your first drive, please read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases. Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The following documents are components of the vehicle: R Digital operator's manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment R Supplementary documents Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Mercedes-Benz Group AG Company 2235842511 2235842511 2 Contents Symbols .......................................................... 5 At a glance ...................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........... 8 Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) ........................................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................. 16 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 18 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 20 Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 22 Digital Operator's Manual .............................. 24 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ........ 24 General notes ............................................... Protecting the environment ........................... Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ Operator's Manual ........................................ Touch-sensitive controls ................................ Mercedes me app ......................................... Service and vehicle operation ........................ 25 25 25 26 27 27 28 Operating safety ............................................ Notes on assembling the license plate on the front license plate holder ......................... National information for components relevant to radio regulation ................................. Diagnostics connection ................................. Qualified specialist workshop ........................ Correct use of the vehicle ............................. Notes for persons with electronic medical aids .............................................................. Problems with your vehicle ............................ Reporting safety defects ................................ Limited Warranty ........................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... Occupant safety ............................................ Brief overview of the most important points ........................................................... Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system ...................................... Purpose and function of the restraint system ............................................................... Seat belts ..................................................... 29 31 31 32 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 36 40 41 Airbags ......................................................... 60 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... Brief overview of most important points ......... Important safety notes .................................. Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children ..................................... Securing the child restraint system ................ Child-proof locks ........................................... 63 63 64 70 70 75 Opening and closing ...................................... 78 SmartKey ...................................................... 78 Doors ............................................................ 83 Trunk ............................................................ 92 Side windows ................................................ 98 Sliding sunroof ............................................ 102 Roller sun blinds .......................................... 107 Anti-theft protection .................................... 109 41 49 53 59 Seats and stowing ....................................... Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. Notes on grab handles ................................ Seats .......................................................... 112 112 112 113 Steering wheel ............................................ Easy entry and exit feature .......................... Memory function ......................................... Memory function in the rear passenger compartment .............................................. Stowage areas ............................................ Cup holder .................................................. Sockets ....................................................... Refrigerator box .......................................... Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... Installing and removing the floor mats ......... 132 133 135 Light and visibility ........................................ Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ............................................ Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... Infrared-reflective windshield function ......... 158 158 168 136 140 150 151 152 154 157 170 172 175 175 Climate control ........................................... 176 Overview of climate control systems ............ 176 Operating the climate control system .......... 178 Driving and parking ..................................... Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT button ............................ Automatic transmission ............................... Function of 4MATIC ..................................... Refueling ..................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems ............... Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 190 190 202 205 209 209 212 220 285 Driver's display ........................................... Notes on the driver's display ....................... Notes on the 3D driver's display .................. Operating the driver's display ...................... Driver display menus ................................... Head-up Display .......................................... Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system ........................................................ Overview of status displays on the driver's display ........................................................ 286 286 286 286 287 288 292 292 Contents 3 MBUX multimedia system ............................ Overview and operation ............................... System settings .......................................... AMG TRACK PACE ....................................... Navigation and traffic .................................. Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me Apps ..................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... Radio & media ............................................. Sound settings ............................................ 294 294 315 320 325 335 339 346 349 355 Maintenance and care ................................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... Maintenance Management .......................... Telediagnosis .............................................. Engine compartment ................................... Cleaning and care ....................................... 356 356 357 357 358 363 Breakdown assistance ................................. Emergency .................................................. Flat tire ....................................................... Battery (vehicle) .......................................... Tow starting or towing away ........................ Electrical fuses ............................................ 372 372 373 379 385 391 4 Contents Wheels and tires ......................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .......................................................... Tire pressure ............................................... Loading the vehicle ..................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ....... Changing a wheel ........................................ Emergency spare wheel ............................... Technical data ............................................. Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ...................................... Radio regulations ........................................ Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview .............................. Operating fluids ........................................... Vehicle data ................................................ 396 396 396 397 397 398 403 407 412 414 424 426 426 426 428 428 430 437 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps .......................................................... 439 Display messages ........................................ 439 Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 501 Index .......................................................... 520 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols: & WARNING Danger due to failure to observe the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or environmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Display in the central display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit 1 Light switch → 158 2 Steering wheel paddle shifters → 207 3 Combination switch → 159 4 Driver's display → 5 DIRECT SELECT lever → 6 ü Start/stop button → è ECO start/stop function → Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 294 a Switches sound on/off → 294 ø Adjusts the volume → 294 205 B £ Hazard warning light system → 160 191 C Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 301 199 D Adjusts the steering wheel → 132 → 133 Driver's display → 286 H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 231 F Diagnostics connection → 32 G M Opens the hood → 358 H ! Electric parking brake → 216 286 7 Central display → 294 8 Glove box → 142 9 Stowage space → 142 A Switch panel for: ÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button → 203 c Active Parking Assist → 272 \ Quick vehicle access ú Fingerprint sensor → 294 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/off E Control panel: 7 8 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) Standard driver's display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 1 #! Turn signal lights → 159 C ÿ Coolant temperature 2 ä Suspension (red) → 513 D Coolant temperature display → 513 ä Suspension (yellow) → 506 E ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 510 F Electric parking brake (red) → 510 → 510 → 510 → 506 J K High beam → 159 L Low beam → 158 T Standing lights → 158 3 # Electrical malfunction → 4 Ù Power steering (red) → 504 F USA only Ù Power steering (yellow) → 504 ! Canada only Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 504 506 G Brakes (red) → 504 $ USA only 5 6 Restraint system → 503 J Canada only 6 ü Seat belt → 503 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only 7 L Distance warning → 513 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 8 ! ABS → 513 9 h Tire pressure monitor → 518 A ; Engine diagnosis → 506 B å ESP® OFF → 513 ÷ ESP® → 513 Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) H 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator I Fuel level 9 10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) K R Rear fog light → 159 L H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 517 12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) Driver's display with driver camera At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 1 #! Turn signal lights → 159 J Canada only 2 ü Seat belt → 503 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only 3 L Distance warning → 513 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 4 6 Restraint system → 503 5 h Tire pressure monitor → 518 6 å ESP® OFF → 513 ÷ ESP® → 513 7 ! ABS → 513 8 ÿ Coolant temperature → 506 9 Coolant temperature display A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 510 B Electric parking brake (red) → 510 F USA only ! Canada only C Brakes (red) $ USA only → 510 → 510 → 506 F R Rear fog light → 159 G K High beam → 159 L Low beam → 158 T Standing lights → 158 H H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 517 I # Electrical malfunction → 506 J ; Engine diagnosis → 506 K Ù Power steering (red) → 504 Ù Power steering (yellow) → 504 Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 504 Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 504 D 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator E Fuel level 13 14 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) L ä Suspension (red) → 513 ä Suspension (yellow) → 513 16 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 168 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 168 4 ; me button → 339 5 D Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rear roller sunblind → 102 6 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off → 7 G SOS button → 339 8 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 168 168 9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 102 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel front roller sunblind → 102 PASSENGER AIR BAG → 46 REAR SEAT AIR BAG → 48 B Inside rear-view mirror → 173 C Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 168 A Indicator lamps: 17 18 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 1 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 2 Adjusts the seats electrically 83 A p Opens/closes the trunk lid → 92 → 113 B D Rear window roller sunblind → 107 3 w Switches the seat heating on/off → 129 → 77 4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 131 C S Child safety lock for the rear side windows 5 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driver's seat → 115 D Opens the door → 83 E W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 98 6 V Operates the memory function → 136 F W Opens/closes the left side window → 98 7 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 172 G Adjusts the head restraints → 123 8 W Opens/closes the right side window → 98 H Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 127 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 98 19 20 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment Vehicles with a reclining rear seat At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment → 177 3 j Sets the fully reclined position → 118 4 V Selects the front passenger seat → 116 5 s Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off → 131 6 w Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 129 7 Adjusts reclining rear seats electrically → 117 8 a Resets the standard seat adjustment settings → 118 1 Climate control rear operating unit 2 Electronics compartment in the center console 9 V Memory function in the rear passenger compartment → 137 → 152 A Stowage box in the seat backrest Refrigerator box B Stowage compartment in the rear armrest C MBUX rear tablet bracket D Cup holder 21 22 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 160 information label on fuel type → 209 399 7 £ Hazard warning light system → 35 2 Safety vests → 372 3 ; me button → 339 information label on tire pressure → → 339 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35 → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 8 Fuel filler flap with: 430 9 Tow-starting or towing away → 386 → 383 A First-aid kit (soft sided) → 373 5 Tow-starting or towing away → 386 B TIREFIT kit → 375 6 Flat tire → 373 C Warning triangle → 372 4 To check and top up operating fluids Jump-starting 23 24 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Open Digital Operator's Manual The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side). R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations about the vehicle functions. R Messages: find additional information about the messages on the driver's display. R Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. You can search for keywords using the Search field in order to quickly find answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. 1 2 3 4 Menu Search Back Contents section Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional options for calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Driver's display: call up brief information about display messages on the driver's display MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Operator's Manual on the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while the vehicle is in motion. General notes Protecting the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emissions of the vehicle are directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is correct. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight. # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and keep a suitable distance from the vehicle ahead. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style. Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. 25 The relevant environmental guidelines and regulations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. 26 General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: R doors R door pillars R sill R seats R cockpit R driver's display R center console R lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 428) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle: R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to press. R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries. R The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date. Note that your vehicle may not have all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. General notes The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance. The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive controls. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle: R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R R Steering wheel MBUX multimedia system The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. You can control these surfaces by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, for example. In the area of the touchscreen, you will also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or the surface structure will change on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, for example. You will receive haptic feedback in the following situations, for example: R When pressing a button on the user interface surface R When scrolling in a list or table R When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up window 27 When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating them: R Do not affix stickers or similar objects to the surfaces R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (/ page 369). Some touch-sensitive controls have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control. Mercedes me app Notes about the on-demand feature You can also activate various functions (ondemand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. 28 General notes Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me Requirements R The vehicle has a wireless connection. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. Ordering and activating on-demand feature Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store. # Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle. # Speeding up activation # Switch the vehicle off and lock it. # Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system. If the activation was not successful, repeat the process. Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R unleaded fuel may not be available for vehicles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R the fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes‑Benz Service Center, or write to one of the following addresses: in the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 in Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the MercedesBenz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the General notes Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet. Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health Change of address or change of ownership In compliance with Proposition 65 (“Prop65”), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if necessary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. ried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs car- Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked component parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and electronic component parts or their software. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 29 30 General notes Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on an unpaved road or offroad, check the vehicle underside regularly. # In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system & DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. General notes If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components after an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label: 31 Observe the following points when mounting the license plate on the front license plate holder: # Mount the license plate directly on the license plate holder without advertising media or other holders. # Mount the license plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the license plate adapter. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. National information for components relevant to radio regulation Notes on assembling the license plate on the front license plate holder * NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect mounting of the license plate on the front license plate holder If the license plate is incorrectly mounted on the front license plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail. USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for 32 General notes compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les émetteurs/récepteurs dans cette véhicule sont conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doivent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. # # & WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you use and connect only products approved by an authorized MercedesBenz Service Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 194). General notes Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant work R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components R 33 Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz Service Center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this Operator's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and ‑regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles 34 General notes Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. General notes If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov. Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. 35 This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage. QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code 36 General notes Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the air bag control unit, for example. Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operat- General notes ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored: R operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R system reactions in special driving situations, such as air bag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- down services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. 37 Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R seat and steering wheel positions R suspension and climate control settings R individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services 38 General notes These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. Online services Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which is collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third-party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of General notes use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data. Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event data recorder USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. 39 The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating; R Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, R How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, 40 General notes that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC („MBUSA“) expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre\-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of Dec 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. R R R R Copyright Free and open source software Information on licenses for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks R R R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. R R R R R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Mercedes‑Benz Group AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. Occupant safety Brief overview of the most important points Basic information Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection: R Sit correctly (/ page 42). R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 43). Function of the seat belt warning lamp ü (/ page 45). Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 45). R The restraint system warning lamp 6 is not lit up after the self-test (/ page 44). R The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag (/ page 46). R The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear air bags (/ page 48). For clear understanding The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions and behaviors that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants. The information is structured as follows: R The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provided with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system and the correct behavior of all vehicle occupants. R Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and functions of the restraint system. R Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Operator's Manual using the keyword directory. Information on the following subjects, among others, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant safety": R Children in the vehicle (/ page 63) R Driving and driving safety systems (/ page 220) R 41 Stowage areas (/ page 140) Defining generic terms clearly In this Operator's Manual, the following generic terms are used: R Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions which help to minimize, as much as possible, the stresses on and consequences for vehicle occupants during an accident. R Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and air bags, for example, are components of the restraint system. R Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 63). Be diligent For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, it is 42 Occupant safety essential that the sitting posture is correct and that the seat belt is correctly fastened. Note that negligence when adjusting your sitting posture and fastening the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts properly before starting every journey. Information on the correct seat position The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection. The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and the additional protection provided by the air bag. The correct seat position with an almost upright posture and a correctly fastened seat belt also reduce the risk posed by the air bag when it is deployed. When choosing the seat, take note of the available space. When you are sitting with the right posture in a nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the air bag cannot provide its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following. # Put the seat in the correct position. # Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. # Observe the following information. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, observe the following information: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly (/ page 112). R R R R When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the center of your shoulder. Keep your distance from the air bags, especially the front air bags. Set the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly. If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should maintain a sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of them. Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct position of the driver's seat (/ page 112). Hold the steering wheel only by the steering wheel rim. This allows the driver's air bag to fully deploy. Occupant safety R R R R Assume a nearly upright position, with your buttocks as far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and seat backrest. This ensures that your back lies as flat and firmly as possible against the seat backrest. While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. Sit with your feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Do not put your feet up on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. Fasten the seat belt correctly. Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can provide the best level of protection only if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint system. 43 Each vehicle occupant must observe the following notes in particular: R The seat belt must not be twisted: R The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the center of your shoulder. R The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible. In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R The shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly against the body after being tightened. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. 44 R R Occupant safety Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illumination on the seat belt buckle does not indicate that the seat belt buckle is functioning correctly. % Observe the information on child seat safety feature of the seat belt (/ page 72). # # # Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 2 of the corresponding seat. To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position. To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages. Function of the restraint system warning lamp When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Occupant safety A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: R the restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the vehicle is switched on R the restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop. 45 Function of the seat belt warning lamp Function of the rear seat belt status display The seat belt warning lamp ü on the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp ü lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passengers doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. The seat belt warning will light up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. The rear seat belt status display on the driver's display reminds you that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again. Display on the driver's display Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened. 46 Occupant safety You can determine the status of the rear seat belt by the color of the seat symbol on the driver's display as follows: R Gray: the rear seat belt is not fastened. R Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat. R Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt. Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (front passenger air bag) & WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger air bag. If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, you must make sure both before and also during the journey that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the situation. Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. After the self-test, you can determine the status of the front passenger air bag as follows: R Front passenger air bag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously. The front passenger air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If Occupant safety R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously. Front passenger air bag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger air bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat. % If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 63) & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system indicator lamp light up simultaneously. 47 In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 67) Deactivating or activating the front passenger air bag The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff can deactivate or activate the front passenger air bag according to the situation. This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat. You cannot manually deactivate or activate the front passenger air bag. 48 Occupant safety Also observe the following information: R The status of the front passenger air bag, see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (/ page 46) R Notes on using the front passenger seat, see "Information on the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff" (/ page 49) R If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 63) Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps l Left rear seat k Right rear seat You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system (/ page 49). Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. After the self-test, you can determine the status of the rear air bag as follows: R Rear air bag disabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously. The rear air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. R Rear air bag enabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out. The rear air bag may be deployed during an accident. Information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat Before beginning the journey, observe the information on the rear air bag (/ page 61). Make sure the status of each rear air bag is correct for the situation. Occupant safety Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Enable or disable the desired rear airbag under Rear Airbags. Information on the child restraint system When installing a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 63). Notes on the child restraint system on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 67). Notes for vehicles with rear air bag If you install a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the notes for vehicles with rear air bag: (/ page 69). Notes for vehicles with belt air bag If you install a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the information on the belt air bag in the rear seat belt: (/ page 59). 49 Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system Function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Sit correctly (/ page 42). R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 43). The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff can activate or deactivate the front passenger air bag according to the situation. Make sure you observe the following information: R Status of the front passenger air bag: see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (/ page 46). R When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 67). 50 Occupant safety Status of the front passenger air bag in relation to the stature of the person: R Front passenger air bag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously. The front passenger air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat. R Front passenger air bag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. Observe the following information on the correct seat position (/ page 42). Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. System limits The front passenger air bag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situation: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is lifted off the seat surface. * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # Store objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the accident situation detected, the window air bag on the front passenger side may deploy. The air bag will be deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. Occupant safety R R R Vehicles with memory function in the rear passenger compartment: moving the outer rear seats to a more favorable seat position. Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Backing up the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. 51 System limits The system will not initiate any action in the following situations: R when backing up The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations: R whilst driving or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the body can also be slightly raised. 52 Occupant safety If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual display message appears (/ page 440). Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system (/ page 52). Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Function of the rear seat belt feeder The seat belt feeder for the rear seat helps you fasten your seat belt. When the door is closed, the seat belt feeder extends. % If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the seat belt feeder can extend when you reach for the seat belt tongue. The seat belt feeder retracts again in the following cases: R the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle R the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within a certain time R the respective door is opened R a certain speed is exceeded after pulling away & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protective function. # Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion. If the seat belt feeder does not automatically retract, you must push it back by hand against the resistance all the way to the stop before starting the vehicle. You can deactivate the seat belt feeder. Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows (/ page 77). When installing a child restraint system on the rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 63). Occupant safety Overview of the automatic measures after an accident Function of the post-collision brake after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures may be implemented, for example: R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lamps R triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 346) R switching off the engine To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more (/ page 191). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle. R switching off the fuel supply R unlocking the vehicle doors R lowering the side windows R displaying the emergency guide on the central display R switching on the interior lighting Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic braking R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force 53 Purpose and function of the restraint system Overview of deployment situations (restraint system) Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection: R Sit correctly (/ page 42). R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 43). Function of the seat belt warning lamp (/ page 45). Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 45). R The 6 restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (/ page 44). R The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag (/ page 46). R The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear air bags (/ page 48). 54 Occupant safety Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag: frontal impact R Knee bag: frontal impact R Side impact air bag: side impact R Window curtain air bag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R Rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat: frontal impact R Belt air bag in the rear seat belt: frontal impact R Cushion air bag in the reclining rear seat: frontal impact R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 60). Observe the information on the function of the restraint system (/ page 54). Information on how the restraint system works How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident. For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment situations" (/ page 53). The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in air bag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts that are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. When enabled, an air bag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each air bag: R Knee bag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag: head and ribcage R Window curtain air bag: head R Side impact air bag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants R Rear air bag: head Occupant safety However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an air bag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hearing. R In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlorate, for example. Information on the limited protection provided by the restraint system Risk due to the incorrect behavior of vehicle occupants Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular: R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 42). R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. 55 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the following in particular: R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 42). R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. 56 R Occupant safety There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. # Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door. & WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional inju- ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat. # Always stow and secure objects correctly. # Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag. The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG (/ page 60) symbol. Observe the following information: R Notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140) R Information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat (/ page 61) Risk due to installing accessories Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers Unsuitable protective covers mean that air bags can no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. # Use only protective covers approved by Mercedes-Benz for the seat in question. In addition, the function of the automatic passenger air bag deactivation may be restricted by an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag (/ page 46). Occupant safety Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle Risk due to modification, damage or wear to the components of the restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended. # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). 57 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. 58 # # Occupant safety Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Use only seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag If you change the cover of an airbag or attach objects, e.g. even stickers, to it, the airbag may no longer function as intended. # Never modify the cover of an airbag. # Do not attach any objects to the cover. The installation location of an air bag is identified by the air bag symbol (/ page 60). & WARNING Risk of injury due to a damaged rear airbag cover # If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. # Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. # You can disable or enable the rear air bag via the multimedia system (/ page 49). Observe the information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat (/ page 61) & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Risk due to components of the restraint system that have already been deployed Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed air bags replaced immediately. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Seat belts Information on the belt air bag in the rear seat belt The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a belt air bag. When activated, the belt air bag increases the protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of an unsuitable child restraint system If you attach a child restraint system using a seat belt equipped with a belt air bag, the belt air bag may damage the child restraint system in the event of an accident or the belt air bag itself can be damaged. # Always secure a child restraint system with an integrated harness system with ISOFIX. # Also secure Top Tether if present. # Never secure a child restraint system with a seat belt equipped with a belt air bag. # 59 Instead, mount the child restraint system e.g. on the front passenger seat. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46). Observe the information on the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shut off (/ page 49). Straightening out a twisted rear seat belt with a belt air bag If the rear seat belt with a belt air bag is twisted, you must straighten it out before fastening the seat belt tongue. # Slide the seat belt tongue upward to the seat belt outlet and hold it. # Pull out the seat belt completely and hold it. The seat belt tongue is now at the more narrow part of the seat belt strap. # Turn the seat belt strap in the seat belt tongue slit until it is in the correct position. 60 # Occupant safety Slide the seat belt tongue downward and allow the seat belt to retract completely. Airbags Overview of air bags Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Rear seats: 1 2 3 4 5 Driver's/front passenger seat: Knee air bag Driver's air bag Front passenger air bag Window air bag Side air bag 4 Window air bag 6 Side air bag 7 Rear air bag The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow symbol M indicates the installation location for certain air bags. Observe the information under "Overview of deployment situations" (/ page 53). Occupant safety Information on the cushionbag in the reclining rear seat The cushionbag offers additional occupant protection in the event of frontal impacts. When triggered, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion. If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes (/ page 63). Information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat The rear air bag offers the occupants on the outer rear seats additional occupant protection in the event of certain types of frontal impacts. When triggered, the rear air bag deploys between the rear seat occupant and the front seat. The rear air bag can help prevent the occupants on the rear seats from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. Always observe the legal requirements for the relevant country. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, you can disable the rear air bag according to the legal requirements. Observe the following information: R Inform persons in the rear seats about the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat. R A person in the rear seat must adopt the correct seating position: R Make sure that the covers for the rear air bags are not damaged. & WARNING Risk of injury due to a damaged rear airbag cover If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. # Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. 61 To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of a rear air bag, observe the following information on the correct seating position: R The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of occupants may be in the deployment area of the rear air bag. If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor, they must adopt the correct seating position and their legs must hang down the front of the seat. R The feet or legs of the person on the rear seat must not rest against the seat backrest of the front seat, for example. Otherwise, their feet and legs are in the deployment area of the rear air bag. This should be taken into consideration especially if you are traveling with a child on the rear seat. If you are traveling with a child in the left or right rear seat, observe the information on the child restrain systems . 62 Occupant safety Objects behind the front seat Objects in the deployment area of the rear air bags may prevent the rear air bags from functioning correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects placed in front of the rear airbag cover Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the rear airbag which is integrated into the front seat. The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an uncontrolled manner and can cause additional injury to the person on the front seat. # Always stow and secure objects correctly. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140). Disabling the rear air bag You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system (/ page 49). You can determine the status of the rear air bag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel (/ page 48). The rear air bags should be disabled in the following situations in particular: R A child restraint system is secured on the left or right rear seat. R The person in the rear seat, for example a child, cannot sit in the correct seat position. Their feet and legs are potentially in the deployment area of the rear air bag. R Due to the position of the front seats, an occupant's legs for example, are in the deployment area of the rear air bag. R Objects are stored behind the front seat which are in the deployment area of the rear air bags. Safely transporting children in the vehicle Brief overview of most important points Safely transporting children in the vehicle R R Secure children up to a height of (1.50 m) on the respective seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child restraint system , and secure small children in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Left/right rear seat (preferred seats) Preferred securing system: ® ISOFIX mounting bracket and ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 74). Always observe the following when transporting children: R Never leave children unattended in the vehicle (/ page 65). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system (/ page 74). Be sure to observe: R If the rear seat is occupied, before commencing the journey ensure that the status of the 63 rear air bag is correct for the current situation (/ page 48). Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46). (*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in combination with automatic air bag shutoff Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system (/ page 74). 64 Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes Basic information Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be installed: Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Use only the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX mounting brackets R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Simply attaching to the ISOFIX mounting brackets on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 73). A child booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a child booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Observe standards for child restraint systems All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 Safely transporting children in the vehicle Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. # # # Important warning notices Always secure a child restraint system correctly R & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. Always observe the vehicle-specific information. Installing the ISOFIX child restraint system on the right and left rear seats (/ page 73). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt (/ page 75). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly mounted or unsecured, it may come loose. The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. Unused child restraint systems could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported in the vehicle unused. Do not modify the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. 65 66 Safely transporting children in the vehicle Use only child restraint systems that are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Safely transporting children in the vehicle In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Warning sticker in the rear passenger compartment 67 Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. Rear air bag (visible when the left or right rear door is open) (/ page 69) If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 70). 68 Safely transporting children in the vehicle If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the additional notes. R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must always be disabled. This is the case only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 46). R The front passenger air bag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing child restraint systems. Information on the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system can interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff. # Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front passenger seat. # The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting against the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. # Always comply with the installation instructions from the child restraint system manufacturer. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information (/ page 67). Rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat If a rearward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit (/ page 46). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA- Safely transporting children in the vehicle BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (/ page 46). Always observe the following information. % Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the front passenger air bag is enabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger air bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child restraint system Forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat If a forward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The status of the front passenger air bag depends on the child restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or does not light up If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and you position the co-driver seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off # Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. # 69 If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat accordingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 46) Notes for vehicles with rear air bag When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the following instructions: R If the rear seat is occupied, observe the information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat (/ page 61) You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system (/ page 49). You can determine the status of the rear air bag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel (/ page 48). 70 Safely transporting children in the vehicle If using a forward-facing child restraint system with enabled rear air bag: make sure that the child's feet are not placed in front of the rear air bag cover or on the seat backrest. The child's legs can otherwise be flung upward if the rear air bag is deployed. Notes for vehicles with belt air bag When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat with a belt air bag, it is essential to observe the following instructions: R Do not use belt-secured child restraint systems other than the approved KIDFIX XP and AMG KIDFIX XP. R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint system using the ISOFIX mounting brackets. R Secure a forward-facing child restraint system with the ISOFIX mounting brackets and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage. R Observe the notes in "Belt air bag in rear seat belt" (/ page 59). Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearwardfacing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Securing the child restraint system Adjusting the seat correctly When installing a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, always observe the following: # Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. % Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. ® When installing an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following: # When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. Safely transporting children in the vehicle # # # When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint. 7 When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, also observe the following: # When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so # # # # that it does not touch the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if available (/ page 74) When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. # # 71 Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint. Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. 7 Depending on the vehicle equipment, always observe the following when installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat: # Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 67). # When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child seat belt: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately replace the head restraint and adjust correctly. # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. 72 Safely transporting children in the vehicle # The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint. Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest possible position. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system. Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest # # # # # # position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Installing a child restraint system # When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound. # Safely transporting children in the vehicle # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. Deactivating the special seat belt retractor Press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. # Installing an ISOFIX child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child is secured in a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated seat belt, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 73 lb (33 kg). 73 Always comply with the information about the mass of the child: R in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX mounting brackets Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. 74 Safely transporting children in the vehicle # Vehicles with reclining rear seats: tilt the backrest of the reclining rear seat back slightly before the ISOFIX child restraint system is installed. Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Pull the tab on upholstered lining 1 upwards and position it on the support surface. Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded upwards. Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehicle. To close, fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Lift the tab from the support surface and slide it back into the upholstery slot between the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery flap. Vehicles with reclining rear seats: return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The reclining rear seat backrest must be in contact with the child restraint system. # # # # # # Fastening a Top Tether & WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after installing a child restraint system (ISOFIX) (left and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle. Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats: The following may occur: R The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose or too tight R The child restraint system may be loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function. # Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH-type % Canada: Only the two outer Top Tether anchorages are available. # Remove cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. # Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or beltsecured child restraint system with Top Tether. Safely transporting children in the vehicle In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. # # # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. # For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat. # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of # # 75 the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system. When installing on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether if present. When installing on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Child-proof locks Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. 76 R R Safely transporting children in the vehicle get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example # # # Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. Safely transporting children in the vehicle Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows: R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door When the child safety lock is activated, the controls in the rear passenger compartment are disabled for: R the rear side windows R the adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment R the rear seat belt extender R the roller sunblinds: of the rear side windows of the rear window in the roof R 77 78 Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of key functions # # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle key with panic alarm 1 Opens/closes the trunk lid 2 Unlocks (with embossed surface) 3 Locks 4 Indicator lamp 5 Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 4 does not light up after you press the Ü or s button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the key battery (/ page 80). The key locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it will lock again. Antitheft protection will be armed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality. Opening and closing Indicator lamp of the vehicle locking system Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close # Activate or deactivate the Acoustic Lock. # # 79 To activate: press button 1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or # Press the start/stop button. A SmartKey belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Requirements: R The vehicle is switched off. Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R To switch between settings: press the Ü and s buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. # Indicator lamp 1 in the trim on the driver's side will flash when the vehicle is locked from outside. In the following cases, indicator lamp 1 will remain off: R when the vehicle is locked from inside R while you are driving 80 R Opening and closing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Deactivating the function of the key Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. # Press and hold the s button on the key. # With the key button s pressed, immediately press key button Ü twice in quick succession. The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time. % You have the following options to reactivate the key: R Press any button on the key. R Start the vehicle with the key in the center console stowage space (/ page 191). Inserting the emergency key Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key Insert emergency key 2 at marking 3 until it engages. % You can use emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # Replacing the key battery # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 will be pushed out slightly. Fully remove emergency key 2. & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise Opening and closing enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of children. # If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. # If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. 81 # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. # Remove the mechanical key (/ page 80). # Press mechanical key 2 into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover 1 closed. 82 # # # # # # # # Opening and closing Insert mechanical key 2 into the opening and lift up covering 3 and remove it. Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery 4 falls out of the key. Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities. Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it. Make sure that covering 3 is completely closed. Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed. Insert the mechanical key again (/ page 80). Problems with the key, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes are: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 78). Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 80). Use the replacement key. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock (/ page 90). Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired: R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference. You have lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. Opening and closing Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 83 This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle will not be unlocked: R if you have locked the vehicle using the key R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESSGO Recessed door handles extend or retract The door handles extend automatically: when you unlock the vehicle with the key R when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle (when the vehicle is unlocked) R # # # To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 1. To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. To open a rear door: pull the rear door handle again. To unlock: press button 1. To lock: press button 2. The red indicator lamp on button 2 will light up once the vehicle is locked. % The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors. # # The door handles retract automatically: R when you lock the vehicle with the key R when pulling away R after waiting for a time 84 Opening and closing R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. The door handles will extend automatically: R when a vehicle key is detected (the vehicle is then not yet unlocked) R when you unlock the vehicle with the key R when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle to unlock it The door handles will retract automatically: when you lock the vehicle with the key R when you touch the recessed sensor surface of the door handle to lock it R after comfort locking (/ page 101) R when you pull away R after a waiting period R # Extend the door handle: Touch the outer 1 sensor surface. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO Requirements R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 363) R on using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 366) R Opening and closing # Unlocking the vehicle: with the door handle extended, touch the inside surface of door handle 1. If the door handle is not extended, e.g. after a waiting period: # Touch sensor surface 2 to unlock. 85 To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface 3. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface 3 for an extended period. % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 101). # 86 Opening and closing Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deactivated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # # Activate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 80). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 78). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 80). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 90). Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close % The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. Activate or deactivate Automatic Door Lock. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R The vehicle is being towed or pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer. # Opening and closing the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when automatically closing the rear doors Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the Ü or s button on the key. R Pull or press the pushbutton switch in the headliner. Opening and closing R R Push against the door or pull the door. By touching the touchscreen in the Comfort menu on the multimedia system. * NOTE Please note when automatically opening and closing the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment Your view of your surroundings may be restricted. # Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area of the doors when opening and closing. # When opening, pay particular attention to low objects and obstacles in the side window area. Opening or closing the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment The following functions are required to automatically open and close the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment: R KEYLESS-GO (/ page 84) R Power closing function (/ page 90) R Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 252) The convenience doors can then be opened and closed automatically. % If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or unavailable, the function of the convenience doors is still available. The following options are available for opening or closing the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment: R The key (to open and close) R The pushbutton switch in the headliner (to open and close) R The outer door handles in the rear passenger compartment (only to close) R R 87 Gesture mode (to close the rear doors from inside) (/ page 304) The multimedia system (/ page 89) % You cannot open a rear door from inside the vehicle if it is secured by the child safety lock. Further information on the child safety lock for the rear doors (/ page 75). Special features of the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment: R If, when closing, the rear door has reached the first detent position, the power closing function (/ page 90) will automatically draw the rear door into the lock. R If the rear doors are closed using the convenience function, they are not automatically locked. # To open with the key: press and hold the Ü button on the key. % In the multimedia system, you can set whether the left rear door, the right rear door or no rear door opens when you press the Ü button on the key (/ page 89). 88 # # Opening and closing If no rear door opens, the convenience opening function is carried out when the Ü button is pressed. The convenience opening function opens, forexample, the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Further information on convenience opening (/ page 100). To close with the key: Press and hold the key button s until the door starts to close. All open rear doors close. Comfort locking with the key: Press and hold the key button s. All open rear doors, side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. % Press the s button on the key again to lock the vehicle. # # # To open with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: press and hold button 1. To manually close with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: pull button 1 to the pressure point. To automatically close with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: pull button 1 past the pressure point. # To close from outside with the door handle: touch recessed sensor surface 1 on the door handle. Blockage detection when opening the rear doors If an obstacle obstructs a rear door during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the rear door. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Opening and closing When opening the rear doors from the inside: the exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is used as an additional safeguard. If an obstacle is detected, the convenience function is deactivated and the moving rear door will be stopped. # Manually open a rear door stopped in an intermediate position. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. Responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants. % Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252). # # Automatic reversing function when closing the rear doors The rear doors are equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops a rear door during the automatic closing procedure, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function does not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R at the end of the closing process In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. 89 Make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: R Press the Ü or s button on the key. R Pull or press the pushbutton switch in the headliner. R Push against the door or pull the door. R By touching the touchscreen in the Comfort menu on the multimedia system. Setting convenience doors Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort # Activate or deactivate Comfort Doors. Operating convenience doors Select ´. # 90 Opening and closing Select Open door control. The window for operating the doors will open. You can open or close the doors using the slider. # Select Cancel Process. The procedure will be interrupted and the door will remain in the position it has reached. # Select Close All. All doors will be closed simultaneously. % The convenience doors can also be closed using MBUX Interior Assist. Further information on operating the convenience doors . # Setting the key function for the convenience doors # Select ´. # Select Key assignment. Convenience Opening for Windows, open Right Rear Door and open Left Rear Door can be set separately for operation with the key. Power closing function & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. % Automatic closing of the doors may be triggered if the vehicle is locked from the outside, or during pulling away. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the mechanical key % If you unlock and open the driver's door with the mechanical key, this triggers the burglar alarm system. % If you unlock the driver's door with the mechanical key, the trunk lid will not be unlocked. # Remove the mechanical key (/ page 80). Opening and closing # # # Forcefully pull door handle 1 outward past the pressure point. Turn the mechanical key back to its starting position. Remove the mechanical key and release the door handle. Locking the doors If the door handle is retracted: # Insert a flat, non-metallic object behind door handle 1 from above and pry it slightly outward. # Reach behind door handle 1 from below, pull it outward to the pressure point and hold it there. If the door handle is extended: # Pull door handle 1 outward to the pressure point and hold it there. # Insert the mechanical key into the lock cylinder. # Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. 91 92 # # # Opening and closing Insert a suitable object, e.g. the mechanical key, into opening 1 on the door lock. To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go. To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside. # Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing * NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obstacles above the vehicle The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. # # Trunk Opening the trunk lid Never drive with the trunk lid open. Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 95). & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Pull remote operating switch 1 until the trunk lid opens. or # # Press and hold the H button on the key. If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. Opening and closing # With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Closing the trunk lid & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again. Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs: R You have locked the vehicle and close the trunk lid while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. 93 To close the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed. % Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing: if you lightly push the trunk lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the trunk lid into the lock. # Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. 94 Opening and closing R Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close. # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The trunk lid will continue to close. # Push remote operating switch 1 until the trunk lid is fully closed. # Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. # With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the H button on the SmartKey. The Opening and closing SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS With the trunk lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 95). # Trunk lid automatic reversing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure R In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle. 95 HANDS-FREE ACCESS function With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking motion will trigger the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 92) and closing (/ page 93) the trunk lid. 96 Opening and closing % A warning tone will sound while the trunk lid is opening or closing. & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door R R # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Make sure of the following: R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg. Opening and closing The trunk lid could be opened or closed unintentionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 80) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations. Switching separate trunk locking on and off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Locking Function 5 Vehicle Switching separate trunk locking on # Select Block Trunk Access. # Create a PIN. # Confirm the PIN with OK. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally. % If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. Switching separate trunk locking off Select Block Trunk Access. # Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. # 97 Resetting the PIN If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate trunk locking with the emergency key. # Select Block Trunk Access. # Confirm Forget PIN?. # Unlock the trunk within three minutes with the emergency key. Separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged. 98 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other Functions # Activate or deactivate Opening Height Limiter. This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows # Press emergency release button 1 briefly. Unlocking the trunk lid with the emergency key # # Take the emergency key out of the SmartKey (/ page 80). Insert the emergency key into the trunk lock as far as it will go. Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise from position 1 to position 2. # Turn the emergency key back to position 1 and remove it. % If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. # & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. Opening and closing # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows. # # 99 When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. # To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. 100 Opening and closing When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. % Vehicles with electric sunblinds on the left and right rear doors: the buttons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds (/ page 107). Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Requirements R The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. # Press and hold the Ü button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. % If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. Opening and closing 101 # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. Requirements R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Press and hold the s button on the key. The following functions will be performed: R The vehicle will be locked. R The side windows will be closed. R The panoramic sliding roof will be closed. # To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button. # To continue convenience closing: press and hold the s button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 84). # Resolving problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: 102 Opening and closing # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 78). Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 80). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During the opening and closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. # If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. Opening and closing 103 # * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. # # # * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel 1. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # To open: swipe backwards across control panel 1 and hold. To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold. To raise or lower: press control panel 1 briefly. To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across control panel 1. To cancel automatic operation: press control panel 1 again. The opening/closing process will be stopped. 104 Opening and closing Operating the rear roller sunblind from the front Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R Towards the end of the closing procedure. R During resetting. R # # To open or close: press button 1. To stop: press button 1 again. If you stop the opening or closing process, the roller sunblind will first be closed again when the process is resumed. # # To open/close manually: push or pull button 1 to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position. To open/close fully: push or pull button 1 beyond the point of resistance and release it. # # or During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. Opening and closing 105 # Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblinds If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. # If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel. Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries! 106 Opening and closing # # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 102) and hold until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. The sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 102) and hold repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed. # Press and hold the control panel for another second. # Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed. # Press and hold the control panel for another second. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. The rear roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the rear roller sunblind. Resetting the rear roller sunblind # # Pull and hold button 1 repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed. Pull button 1 for another second. Opening and closing 107 # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind. Extending or retracting the rear window roller sunblind & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Roller sun blinds Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows. 1 Rear left side window/roller sunblind 2 Rear right side window/roller sunblind # # To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing. To open fully: press the corresponding button. Extending or retracting from the driver's seat * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction. # Do not place any objects on the rear shelf. 108 Opening and closing # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Extending or retracting from the rear passenger compartment * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction. # Do not place any objects on the rear shelf. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. # # # Press button 1. To extend: pull switch 1. To retract: press switch 1. When the child safety lock for the rear side windows is activated, switch 1 cannot be operated. Opening and closing 109 Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobilizer will automatically be activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system will not be operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ▌Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the trunk lid is opened R when the hood is opened R when interior protection is triggered (/ page 110) R when the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 110) The ATA system will be armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations: R after the vehicle is locked with the key R after the vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 will flash when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system will be deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after the vehicle is unlocked with the key R after the vehicle is unlocked using KEYLESSGO 110 Opening and closing R after the start/stop button is pressed with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 191) ▌Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, s or H button on the key. or # Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 191) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # With the key outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door handle. Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. An audible and visual alarm will be triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm will automatically be armed after approximately 60 seconds: R after the vehicle is locked with the key R after the vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm will be armed only when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid The tow-away alarm will automatically be deactivated: R after the Ü or H button on the key is pressed R after the start/stop button is pressed with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 191) R after the vehicle is unlocked using KEYLESSGO R when HANDS-FREE ACCESS is used Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 218). Arming/deactivating tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or deactivate Tow-away Protection. Tow-away alarm is armed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Function of interior protection % This function may not be available in all countries. When interior protection is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Opening and closing 111 Interior protection is armed only when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid Interior protection is automatically deactivated: R after pressing the Ü or H button on the key R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 191) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: when there are moving objects suchas mascots in the vehicle interior R if a side window is open R if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is open R Arming/deactivating interior protection Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. Interior protection is armed again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. 112 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the driver's display clearly You have a good overview of the traffic conditions Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt correctly . Notes on grab handles & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. Seats and stowing 113 Seats Adjusting the front seat electrically & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" and "Children in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. 114 Seats and stowing & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seatbelt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. & WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. Seats and stowing 115 Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 136). % The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position. % Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: the fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle. # Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat 1 Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles 2 3 4 5 6 7 with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint) Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft position Seat backrest inclination You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Memory function 116 Seats and stowing # # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door operating unit. Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the rear passenger compartment 6 Front passenger seat footrest 7 Seat fore-and-aft position The footrest can be adjusted only when one of the following conditions has been fulfilled: R The front passenger seat has moved to the front range. R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. Adjust the reclining rear seat (/ page 117). To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. # Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment. % You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 77). # # 1 2 3 4 5 Selects the front passenger seat Head restraint fore-and-aft position Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Seat height Seats and stowing 117 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Adjusting reclining rear seats electrically The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. The reclining rear seats are on the driver's and front passenger sides. 1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint 1 2 3 4 Higher Softer Lower Firmer # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. 2 3 4 5 6 (vehicles with active multicontour seat) Head restraint height Seat backrest inclination Combined seat cushion inclination and length Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest Angle of the leg rest 118 Seats and stowing Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 137). % The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. % The vehicle also has a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest (/ page 121). # Setting the fully reclined position R R # To set the fully reclined position: press button 1. R The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position. R The front passenger seat will move into the position for chauffeur mode. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. If available, the leg rest will rise. To restore the standard seat settings: press button 1. % You can use the rear passenger-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 77). # Seats and stowing 119 % The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. Chauffeur mode ▌Information on chauffeur mode & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. * NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage net of the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat to the chauffeur position Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is adjusted to the chauffeur position. # Remove the objects from the luggage net. * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. Observe the following: R Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode before the journey For chauffeur mode, the following settings are made for the front passenger seat: R The seat is moved forwards R The backrest is tilted forwards 120 Seats and stowing R The head restraint is folded forwards The front passenger seat will automatically move from the chauffeur position back into the normal position in the following situations: R The front passenger seat is adjusted using the buttons in the door operating unit on the front passenger side R The front passenger seat belt buckle is fastened R An occupant is detected on the front passenger seat R The front passenger seat backrest is adjusted rearwards. R The front passenger seat is moved in the foreand-aft direction out of the chauffeur area ▌Positioning the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode Requirements R The front passenger seat is not occupied. R The front passenger seat belt is not inserted in the buckle. 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Seats and stowing 121 Setting the chauffeur position # Push button 2 forwards and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move forward and stop at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. # Release button 2. # Push button 2 forward and hold it again until the front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. The front passenger seat head restraint will fold forwards. The front passenger seat will move forward. % If the front passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode, the position for chauffeur mode will be set immediately. # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 137). % You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 77). ▌Using the footrest on the front passenger seat Requirements R The front passenger seat has moved to the front range. R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. Using the footrest The footrest is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest. # # # Push button 1 towards the rear. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. Push the extended footrest upwards with your foot until it releases. Allow the footrest to lower. The footrest will position itself on the floor. 122 Seats and stowing Stowing the footrest # # Push the footrest upwards with your foot until it engages. Push button 1 forwards. The footrest will retract underneath the front passenger seat. ▌Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position (chauffeur mode) # To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Setting the normal position # Push button 3 towards the rear and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The Seats and stowing 123 head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. The front passenger seat will then move further towards the rear. or Briefly push button 2 towards the rear. The front passenger seat will move automatically to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. % You can also set the normal position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side. # Call up the settings with the memory function (/ page 137). % You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 77). # Head restraints ▌Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. 124 Seats and stowing # # To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards. To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. ▌Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the front-seat luxury head restraint # # # # # # To attach the additional cushion: open hookand-loop tape 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1. Guide hook-and-loop tape 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3. Close hook-and-loop tape 4. To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down. To remove the additional cushion: open hookand-loop tape 4 of additional cushion 1. Remove additional cushion 1. ▌Lowering and positioning the rear seat head restraints electrically from the front compartment Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y # Tap on ü. The outer head restraints will lower. # Tap on ü again. The outer head restraints will move into the last stored position. # Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible. ▌Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats manually # To adjust the head restraint angle: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow 1. Seats and stowing 125 ▌Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compartment (individual seats) # # # # # Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3. Close Velcro strip 4. To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down. To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 of additional cushion 1. Remove additional cushion 1. Attaching a heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion. # Attach the additional cushion to the head restraint as described. # Move the head restraint to the very top. # # Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible. To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1. # # # # # Push press-studs 2 on the additional strap into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint. Move the head restraint to the desired height. To switch neck heating from the additional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs 2 on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint. Ensure that the "Couple neck heating to seat heating" function is active in the multimedia system (/ page 127). Activate or deactivate the seat heating (/ page 129). 126 Seats and stowing ▌Folding the center head restraint into position and folding it down manually (premium seats) The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position. Folding down ▌Folding the center head restraint into position and folding it back manually # # # # To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages. Press button 1. Fold down the head restraint completely. To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages. Seats and stowing 127 Folding down When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position. Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Adjusting the air cushions # On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bolsters. # # Press button 1. Fold down the head restraint completely. The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. Setting the seat heating balance # Select Heating Settings. # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. % The seat heating balance can be set in the Seat Climate Control menu in the rear passenger compartment. Coupling neck heat to seat heating Select Additional Neck Warmer. # # Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating. Setting automatic seat adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: 128 Seats and stowing # a) Pressing the warning message on the central display. or # b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Automatic Seat Positioning Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. # Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set. % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronizing user profiles . % If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches. Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Dynamic Multicontour Seat. With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjusted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle. # Select the desired setting. Overview of massage programs R R R R R R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing massage with upward-moving relaxing waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving relaxing waves. Hot Relaxing Back: Based on hot stone massage, the program combines heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Hot Relaxing Shoulders Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. Wave Massage Regenerating massage via soothing waves across the back and in the seat cushion. Seats and stowing 129 R R R R R Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs. Deep Workout: Combines the Workout, Backrest with the Workout, Cushion. The vibrations in the cushion intensify the effectiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the buttocks and legs. Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles. Calf Massage (Rear passenger compartment): calf massage using vibration. Can support metabolic processes and the flow of blood back to the heart. Wave Massage (Rear passenger compartment): Combines the vibration of the calf mas- sage with the Classic Massage from the backrest in the rear passenger compartment. Selecting a massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 128). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch Intensive on or off . % The availability of this function is dependent on the vehicle's equipment. % For the rear seats, the massage programs can be selected on the following devices (if available): R On the rear displays R On the MBUX rear tablet Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Reset. # Select ß for the desired seat. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. 130 Seats and stowing * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Requirements R The power supply is switched on. Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. # Seats and stowing 131 % If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active. % You can set the heat distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system (/ page 127). % Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can adjust the heating of the center console and door armrests using the multimedia system (/ page 131). Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The power supply is switched on. Setting the panel heating Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armrests, the center panels of the doors and the center console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. 132 Seats and stowing % If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. 1 2 3 4 To move up To move back To move down To move forward # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 136). Seats and stowing 133 Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Linking the steering wheel heater to the seat heating Requirements R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings # Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating. The steering wheel heater will be linked to the seat heating. # Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. When the function has been activated, the steering wheel heater will automatically be activated and deactivated when you switch the seat heating on and off. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped. # Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: 134 Seats and stowing # Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on (/ page 127). When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move as follows: R The steering wheel will move upwards. R The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle. This will occur in the following situations: You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off. R % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed. R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch off the vehicle. R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process. Seats and stowing 135 Setting the easy entry and exit feature Requirements R The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 127). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature # Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering Wheel Only or Off. % If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically . Memory function Function of the memory function # & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel. If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped. & WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. 136 Seats and stowing You can save the following settings for the front seat: R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Vehicles with an active multicontour seat: Side bolsters of the seat backrest Shoulder of the seat backrest Contour of the seat backrest Dynamic function level R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up display (depending on vehicle equipment) Operating the memory function # Storing # Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. To call up: press the preset position button 4, T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically. Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Function of the memory function in the rear passeonger compartment # # Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position. Press the V button and then release it. Operating the rear seat Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment. Seats and stowing 137 You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment. You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R R Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest Operating the rear seat via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment Storing The following settings are also stored to a memory position, if the indicator lamp in the v button lights up: R Position of the footrest of the front passenger seat, if available R Position of the screen, if available Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat. # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up. Adjust the rear seat using the buttons on the door control panel (/ page 117). 138 Seats and stowing Calling up Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up. # Press one of preset position buttons 4 or T. The seat is moved to the stored position. After you release the button, the rear seat continues to move into the stored position automatically. # Press the V button and then release it. Press one of the preset position buttons 4 or T within three seconds. The settings are stored. % You cannot store any settings on the j and a buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions. Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment Storing # # # Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up. Seats and stowing 139 # # # # Adjust the rear seat using the buttons on the door control panel (/ page 117). Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 113). Ensure that the indicator lamp in button 1 lights up. Calling up Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. # Press one of preset position buttons 4 or T. The seat is moved to the stored position. After you release the button, the front seat and rear seat continue to move into the stored position automatically. % The preset positions in the area for chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for chauffeur mode are fulfilled (/ page 119). % You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 77). # Press the V button and then release it. Press one of the preset position buttons 4 or T within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected preset position. % You cannot store any settings on the j and a buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions. # # 140 Seats and stowing Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. Vehicles with rear air bag: Also observe the notes on the rear air bag . & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # # # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the notes on the cup holders. Vehicles with automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the frontpassenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 47). * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. Seats and stowing 141 & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight. # # The rear armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed. Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter. R children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects. # # # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. 142 Seats and stowing # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including load and occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. Distribute the load on the parcel net hooks evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the R R bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140). Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 202). % For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior ▌Overview of the front stowage compartments 1 Stowage spaces in the doors 2 Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones 4 Stowage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system 5 Glove box Seats and stowing 143 % The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front center console 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 369). ▌Locking/unlocking the glove box # Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to unlock). ▌Folding the folding table out or in & WARNING Risk of injury when the folding table is folded out Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves. # Use the folding table only when the vehicle is stationary. # Stow the folding table before each journey. & WARNING Risk of injury from the rear air bag when the folding table is folded out When the rear air bag deploys objects on the folding table may be thrown in the direction of vehicle occupants. # When using the table, deactivate the rear air bag. # Stow the folding table before each journey. * NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back. # Make sure that the folding tables are folded in when moving the front seats back. * NOTE Damage to objects when the folding tables are expanded or collapsed Objects such as tablets and displays can be damaged when the folding tables are expanded or collapsed. # Make sure that the folding tables are expanded and collapsed properly. Folding out % Observe the notes on the rear air bag. 144 Seats and stowing ▌Removing the handset from the rear passenger compartment stowage compartment Opening the stowage compartment in center console 1 of the rear passenger compartment. # Pull folding table 2 up and forwards by handle recess 3 and swing it outwards. # Fold the table panels apart. % The table panels can be rotated forwards or backwards to bring them into a comfortable position for the vehicle occupants in the rear passenger compartment. # To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table. # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats # # # # Fold down the rear armrest. Open the stowage compartment in the rear armrest . Tap handset 1. Handset 1 will rise. Remove handset 1. Vehicles with individual rear seats # # # Open the stowage box in the rear passenger compartment backrest. Press button 1. Remove the handset. Seats and stowing 145 Overview of the parcel net hooks Observe the following notes: R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. R Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are intended only as anti-slip protection for light loads. R Do not route tie downs across sharp edges or corners. R Pad sharp edges for protection. Depending on the equipment installed, the trunk contains up to four parcel net hooks. 1 Parcel net hooks Opening the through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment Requirements: R The loading flap is unlocked (/ page 147). Vehicles with individual rear seats 146 Seats and stowing Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats # # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: Fold down the rear armrest. Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2. The stowage box in the rear passenger compartment backrest will be opened. Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats # # Slide release catch 2 in the handle recess of loading flap 1 upwards. Loading flap 1 will be unlocked. Push loading flap 1 with release catch 2 up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position. The through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment will be opened. Seats and stowing 147 If the through-loading feature is to be used as a stowage compartment again: # Fold down loading flap 1 and lock it in the trunk (/ page 147). Locking the through-loading feature in the trunk Requirements: R The refrigerator box is removed. Using the bag hooks & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Pull bag hook 2 down by tab 1. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140). # # Slide the release catch on loading flap 1 in the trunk to the right. The loading flap is locked. 148 Seats and stowing EASY-PACK trunk box # ▌Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK trunk box to any position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and objects may be thrown upwards. # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the floor. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the floor downward. # Remove all objects from the floor before raising it. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box in Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the trunk box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so. # # Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK trunk box. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the extended EASYPACK trunk box The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged when it is extended. # Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK trunk box frame. # Do not close the trunk lid when the EASY-PACK trunk box is extended. * NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk box by objects Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be thrown out. # Do not transport objects that are sharpedged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the trunk. # Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. # Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box when the rear seats are folded forwards. The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the trunk floor when the load reaches approximately 11 lbs (5 kg). Seats and stowing 149 % Observe the notes on cleaning the EASYPACK trunk box (/ page 369). ▌Installing and removing the EASY-PACK trunk box Installing # # # # To remove: pull handle 2 on the box. To increase the load capacity: push the center of floor 1 downwards to the desired position and box size. To reduce the load capacity: press button 3. To stow: push the box in completely using handle 2 until it locks in place. 150 Seats and stowing Removing # # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Insert retainers 3 of box 1 into holes 2. Raise box 1 in the direction of the arrow and press hooks 5 into the anchorages of rear passenger compartment shelf 4. Turn rotating catches 6 inward. # # # Turn rotating catches 6 outward. Lower box 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear passenger compartment shelf. Pull box 1 back out of the openings in the direction of the arrow. Cup holder Switching on or off the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder insert. When placing champagne flutes in the holders in the front stowage compartments in the rear passenger compartment center console, do not close the covers on the front stowage compartments because the champagne flutes may tip over. When placing glasses in the temperature-controlled cup holder, do not close the cover on the front stowage compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console because the glasses may tip over. Seats and stowing 151 % Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperaturecontrolled cup holder 1 only with a soft cloth. Front stowage compartments in the rear passenger compartment center console with temperature-controlled cup holders and holder for champagne flutes (example) 1 Temperature-controlled cup holder 2 Button to switch the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off 3 Holder for champagne flutes # # To switch on: press button 2 until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up. To switch off: press button 2 until the indicator lamp on the button goes out. Placing champagne flutes in the holders in the front storage compartments in the rear passenger compartment center console # To place: put the champagne flutes into holders 3 until they slot into place. # To remove: pull the champagne flutes upwards out of holders 3. Sockets Using the 12 V socket Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are 12 V sockets in various places in the vehicle, such as the center console, the glove box and the trunk. # Fold up the socket cover. # Insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. USB port in the rear passenger compartment Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle will have the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment: R In vehicles with individual rear seats: in the stowage compartment of the rear passenger compartment center console . R In vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the electronics compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console . R In vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest . % These USB ports in the rear passenger compartment can be used to charge a mobile end device. 152 Seats and stowing You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on. Refrigerator box Using the refrigerator box & WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered vent grille on the refrigerator box If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator box, it may overheat. # Always make sure that the vent grille is not covered. The vent grille for the refrigerator box is in the trunk. The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). The upper compartment of the refrigerator box can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles with a maximum capacity of 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters) and cans with a capacity of up to 11 fl. oz. (0.33 liters) If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. More condensation may occur during heavy use. Cleaning may be required. The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capacity or switch off in the following cases: R Too many electrical consumers are turned on. R The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage. Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear passenger compartment armrest. Pull handle 1 on stowage box and fold down cover 2 of the stowage box. Seats and stowing 153 # To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out. Removing or installing the refrigerator box Installing Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box 1 and fold down the cover of the refrigerator box. To switch on: press button 2 repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up. # # # Remove cover cap 1. Open loading flap 2 in the rear passenger compartment until the loading flap locks in the highest position (/ page 145). Pull upwards and hold handle 7. The connection to refrigerator box 4 is unlocked. 154 Seats and stowing # # Slide the refrigerator box with handle 7 up into the open through-loading feature. Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box 3 are inserted into sockets 5 and 6 of the through-loading feature. Once the refrigerator box has been connected in the vehicle, push down handle 7. The refrigerator box is locked. Removing # Pull up and hold handle 7. # Pull the refrigerator box with handle 7 up out of sockets 5 and 6 of the though-loading compartment. Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box 3 are separated from sockets 5 and 6 of the through-loading feature. Opening and closing the stowage compartment of the refrigerator box in the trunk Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly # # To open: pull the stowage compartment in refrigerator box 1 out by the handle backwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment 1 will be opened. To close: slide the stowage compartment in refrigerator box 1 forwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment 1 will be closed. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Seats and stowing 155 # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone storage compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment. R R * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids (/ page 34). R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone will be connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are available only if the vehicle is switched on. R R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone cradle. Large mobile phones that do not rest flat in the mobile phone cradle may not be able to be charged or connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers that are necessary for wireless charging are an exception. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front Requirements R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. 156 Seats and stowing A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehicle has the following options for wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the cockpit: R In the front stowage compartment R In the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest Example: wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment # A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment: when a charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions when charging the mobile phone are shown in the central display. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the center console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # # Open the stowage compartment in the rear center console. Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging proc- Seats and stowing 157 ess are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140). # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. # Installing and removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # # # # To install: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits. Press studs 1 onto holders 2. Adjust the corresponding seat. To remove: slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders 2. Adjust the corresponding seat. 158 Light and visibility Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch ▌Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off. When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the side lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the parking lamps Do not have the parking lamps switched on over a period of several hours. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand parking lights X Right-hand parking lights T Side lamps and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) If the battery is insufficiently charged, the side lamps or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except side lamps and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on locator lighting (/ page 167). Light and visibility 159 Switching on accident scene lighting # Switch off the vehicle. # Switch on the hazard warning lights (/ page 160). # Turn the light switch from the à position to the L position. The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off. The accident scene lighting will be switched off if: R you switch off the hazard warning lights. R you turn the light switch back to Ã. R the battery is insufficiently charged. ▌Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the parking lamps, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the ambient light. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. Operating the combination switch for the lights The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting. ▌Switching the rear fog light on/off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à position. # Press button R . Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right Headlamp flashing Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to select the desired function. 160 Light and visibility Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K. Switching off high beam Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. # Headlamp flashing # Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signals # To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if: R the air bag has been deployed. # Light and visibility 161 Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIGITAL LIGHT ▌Intelligent Light System function With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road. % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 161) R Cornering light (/ page 161) R Highway mode (/ page 162) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 162) R Bad weather light (/ page 162) R City lighting (/ page 162) R Topographical compensation (vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 162) The system is active only when it is dark. ▌Active headlamps function R R The headlamps follow the steering movements. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. ▌Cornering light function The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on. The function will be active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned 162 Light and visibility Traffic circle and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle or intersection. ▌Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera R the navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: R at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) ▌Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces reflective glare and improves the illumination of the edge of the road. The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched off. ▌Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result. ▌The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function will be active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas ▌Function of the topographical compensation Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains virtually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients. Light and visibility 163 % Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function. ▌Assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The system will be active in the following cases: R The light switch is in the à position. R High beam is switched on. % If you activate the head-up display with augmented reality, the projections can be deactivated depending on the situation. % Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the applicable requirements. Spotlight Notes The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will be made aware of the position of oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol. The function will be active in the following circumstances: R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R The system detects a lane marking. If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows: R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone. Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 246). ▌Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Requirements R The ignition is switched on. 164 Light and visibility Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Activate or deactivate Dynamic Low Beam. % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu. Activating or deactivating enhanced assistance functions % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. # Select Supporting Projections. # Activate or deactivate the desired projection. # Switch Projection for locator lighting/vehicle stop on or off. If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked. You can choose between the Digital Rain and Star Wave sequences. % More information on locator lighting (/ page 167) More information on the exterior switch-off delay time (/ page 167) Adaptive Highbeam Assist ▌Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. Light and visibility 165 The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. ▌Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low-beam headlamps R High beam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically. Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. Switching off Switch off high beam using the combination switch. # Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ▌Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. 166 Light and visibility # ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically. Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low-beam headlamps R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically. R at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h): R The ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically. Light and visibility 167 At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically. R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically. R % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. ▌Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada) Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. When partial high beam or high beam is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up. Switching off # Switch off high beam using the combination switch. Switching the daytime running lights on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Switch the daytime running lights on or off. % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the daytime running lights can be switched on or off in the DIGITAL LIGHT menu. % The availability of the function is dependent on the country. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting 5 External Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Activating/deactivating the locator lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting. When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated. 168 Light and visibility Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear passenger compartment) # # 1 c Switches the front interior lighting on/ off. 2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/ off. 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off. # To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or 5. To switch reading lamps off: press button 1 once or twice. When you press it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. When you press it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press button 2. The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out. 1 p Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle 2 u Rear interior lighting # To switch reading lamps on: press button 1. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Light Setting the color Select Color. # Select Monochrome or Multi-color. # Set the desired color or color scheme. # Light and visibility 169 Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. % Depending on the ambient light, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes. Activating the brightness for zones Select Brightness. # Switch off Link Zones. The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately. % The Light Band zone can also be set in vehicles with active ambient lighting. # Activating effects & WARNING Risk of accident despite the ambient lighting and active ambient lighting effects being activated The warning assistance effects are fully active only when the relevant driving or driving safety systems are activated in the Driving Assistance menu. # Make sure that the relevant driving or driving safety systems are activated. % Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). # Select Effects. # Activate the desired effect. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available. Operating feedback effects R Climate: If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. R Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visually animated. R Greeting: When you get into the vehicle, a special color animation will play. Warning assistance effects Warning When Exiting: If an object is detected in the blind spot while you are getting out of R R R R the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red. Further information on the exit warning (/ page 252). Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255). Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the center of the cockpit will flash bright red. Further information on Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist. Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 252). 170 Light and visibility Multi-color Animation R The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. % In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played. % The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the Z symbol. Depending on the equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available. % If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Activate or deactivate Interior Lighting Delay. If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a short time after the end of the journey. Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off 1 2 3 4 5 g Windshield wipers off Ä Automatic wiping, normal Å Automatic wiping, frequent ° Continuous wiping, slow ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Light and visibility 171 Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wipes with washer fluid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 363). In position 2 or 3 , the windshield washing process is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windshield unless the Add Washer Fluid message is displayed. # Deep-cleaning the windshield In the case of heavy soiling, you can deep-clean the windshield above outside temperatures of 41°F (5°C). # In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination switch to position 1, 2 or 3. # Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it for approximately two seconds. The wiper arms will move into their replacement positions and washer fluid will be distributed on the windshield. After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the windshield several times. Deep-cleaning will now have finished. Removing the wiper blades Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch off the vehicle. # Within around 15 seconds, press the î button on the combination switch (/ page 170). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position. # To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click. 172 Light and visibility # To remove the wiper blade: press release knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 3 and remove. Installing the wiper blades Press the wiper blade beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 3 on the wiper arm. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. % Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing. # Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion # Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you. Light and visibility 173 Adjusting the outside mirrors # Use button 1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror. Folding the outside mirrors in/out # Briefly press button 3. % If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button 3. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mirror. % In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the left or right(/ page 309). Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows. # Press and hold button 3. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 174 Light and visibility R R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into antiglare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 174). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another transmission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. # The parking position makes parking easier. # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Light and visibility 175 Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position. Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close # Activate or deactivate Automatic Mirror Folding. Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on areas 1 of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heater R Infra-red reflective windshield Infrared-reflective windshield function The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. 176 Climate control 3 ¬ Defrosts the windshield Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control (/ page 179, 183) 4 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off An interior air filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 5 6 Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated. Front climate bar on the central display (example) 1 s Increases the temperature 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of j switching off climate control (/ page 178), g switching air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 181) and 0 synchronisation function (/ page 180) 7 8 9 A (/ page 179) or G Calls up the fine particulate status display (/ page 178) or Activates/deactivates residual engine heat utilization (/ page 181) ¤ Switches the rear window defroster on/off Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, display for the defrost function, airflow, pre-entry climate control or auxiliary heating J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 178) r Reduces the temperature à Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 179) ± Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 178) Climate control 177 B à Sets climate control to automatic mode, Overview of the rear operating unit left (/ page 179) C I Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(/ page 178) 3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com4 % The climate bar will remain visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off (/ page 178). % The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment. % Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC: if Distance Assist DISTRONIC intervenes, the climate bar display on the central display will be made smaller. 5 6 7 8 Example: USA 1 Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compartment, left 2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left 9 A B C partment, left, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) Switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) or switches residual heat on/off (/ page 181) Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 178) Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right Sets the air distribution to the right rear footwell vents Synchronization is activated (/ page 180) Sets the air distribution to the rear left footwell vents Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left 178 Climate control The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multimedia system (/ page 180) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off Switching on climate control Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the central display or # Press Ã, s, r or ±. # Switching off climate control # Set the airflow to level 0 via I on the climate bar on the central display or # Press j. If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly. % If climate control is switched off via j, OFF will be shown on the climate bar. Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit Switching on # Press the 4 button. or # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using buttons 3 and 5. or # Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or C. Switching off # Press the 4 button. or # Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 and 5. % If rear climate control is switched off via button 4, OFF will be shown on the display. Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press button ¿. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction. Calling up the air conditioning menu using the climate bar The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on the lower edge of the central display. # Select the Climate Menu entry in the air conditioning bar. The First Row of Seats menu is opened. Jumping directly to the Air Quality menu # Select the G fine particle status display in the air conditioning bar. The Air Quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown. Climate control 179 % The fine particle status display is on the home screen next to the temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the µg/m3 units (micrograms per cubic meter). Strong acceleration after longer parking periods will lead to a detachment of the dust covering the vehicle. This dust measured by the PM2.5 sensor might lead to a short rise of outside values. Defrosting the windshield via the climate bar Switching on # Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display. Switching off Press ¬, à or j on the climate bar on the central display or # set the airflow to 0. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the air conditioning menu Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central display. # Select A/C (A/C). # Setting climate control to automatic mode via the climate bar In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automatically and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display. % You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing K on the climate bar on the central display. # To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g. P. Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. 180 Climate control % When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the ¯ climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved. Setting the footwell temperature Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select ^ and set the desired footwell temperature using the slider. Setting rear climate control using the air conditioning menu Switching the synchronization function on/off via the air conditioning menu Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats The synchronization function controls the climate control centrally. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically adopted for each climate zone. # Select SYNC (SYNC). Setting the temperature Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the temperature. # Sets the airflow # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the air flow with s or r. Controlling rear climate control automatically # Select AUTO. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, press either ¬, à or j set the air flow to level 0 (/ page 179). Deactivating rear climate control # Select REAR OFF. Removing condensation from the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press à on the climate bar on the central display. # If the windows remain fogged up: press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press à on the climate bar on the central display. Climate control 181 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats # Press g in the upper display area of the climate bar. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching residual heat mode on/off via the climate bar Requirements R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature is sufficiently high. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approx- imately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To switch on or off: select Residual Heat on the climate bar of the central display. The residual heat function will automatically switch off after some time. % If residual engine heat utilization is activated, the two buttons for setting the temperature and air distribution will automatically be deactivated. Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit Requirements R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature is sufficiently high. When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear passenger compartment, you can heat or ventilate the front and rear compartments for approximately 15 minutes. # Press buttonÌ. Activating/deactivating ionization Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality When ionization is activated, the interior air is enriched with negatively charged oxygen ions. This can promote the well-being of the vehicle occupants. # Select Ionization. % The function can be performed only if AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed. Fragrance system ▌Activating/deactivating the fragrance system using the multimedia system Requirements R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box will close. R A flacon is inserted. 182 Climate control Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box. # Navigate down until the climate control bar is active. # Select Fragrance. # Activate or deactivate fragrancing. ▌Setting the fragrance system using the multimedia system Requirements R A flacon is inserted. R The glove box will close. R Climate control is activated. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box. # # Select Fragrance. Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons ▌Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. Climate control 183 If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturer's safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back onto the flacon. # 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: after opening the glove compartment, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the flacon. Information on the windshield heater & WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not touch the windshield while the windshield heater is switched on. # Allow the windshield to cool down before touching it. The windshield heater will be enabled automatically if ¬ is activated on the climate bar on the central display. After the vehicle is started, the windshield heater will be switched on automatically as required. 184 Climate control Pre-entry climate control for departure time ▌Pre-entry climate control for departure time function & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. % This function is available only for MercedesAMG vehicles, plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system. The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked. Plug-in hybrid: When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge. The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced in the following circumstances: R Plug-in hybrid: The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. R The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is not fully charged. Plug-in hybrid: With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected. If present, seat ventilation will be activated in cooling and ventilation modes. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will be activated in heating mode, if available: R Seat heating R Steering wheel heating R Panel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window defroster R Windshield heater When the set temperature is changed, climate control mode will automatically be updated and switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode. Climate control 185 ▌Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time via the climate bar Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. Setting the departure time % Plug-in hybrid: set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information on the charging settings . # Select Edit Departure Time u . # Select a departure time or set a new departure time. Setting the repeat days # Select Edit Departure Time u . # Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply. # Press OK to confirm. Selecting seats # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear Right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats. If a departure time is set, a yellow LED will appear on the climate bar of the central display. In addition, an LED on the climate bar will indicate when pre-entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled and red when it is being heated. ▌Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time Requirements R The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is charged sufficiently. R The function has been activated via the multimedia system. # To activate: set the departure time (/ page 185). Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of 5 minutes before the selected departure time. # To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early: press & on the climate bar on the central display or switch off the preselection of the time in the climate menu. If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Panel heating Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will also be adjusted during preentry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation: R Fragrancing R Ionization 186 Climate control Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. Requirements R The vehicle is switched off. % Immediate pre-entry climate control is available only for plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system. The vehicle interior can continue to be air-conditioned, e.g. during a break in driving, for up to 50 minutes for plug-in hybrids and up to 5 minutes for vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system. # Press & on the climate bar on the central display. The red or blue indicator lamp below & on the climate bar on the central display will light up or go out. # Set the temperature using the s and r arrows on the climate bar on the central display. The colors of the indicator lamp have the following meanings: R Blue: ventilation or cooling mode is switched on. R Red: heating mode is switched on. R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. Air vents ▌Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. Climate control 187 To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet grille free of residue build-up (/ page 363). # # # # To open the center and side air vents: press button 1. The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened completely. To close the center and side air vents: press button 1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely. To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold the center of outer side air vent 2 and move it up or down or to the left or right. To adjust the airflow direction of the center air vent: hold the center of air vent 3 and move it up or down or to the left or right. ▌Adjusting the rear air vents & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # # # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To open the rear air vents in the center console: press button 1. The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up. 188 Climate control # # To close the rear air vents in the center console: press button 1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely. To adjust the airflow direction of the rear air vents in the center console: hold the center of air vent 2 and move it up or down or to the left or right. # # # To open the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button 1. If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open. To close the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button 1 again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed. To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: hold the center of air vent 2 and move it up or down or to the left or right. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box. ▌Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent Climate control 189 # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the right or left. 190 Driving and parking Driving Switching on the power supply or the vehicle # # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. Requirements R The key is in the vehicle and is detected. R The brake pedal is not depressed. # To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once. You can, for example, switch on the windshield wiper. The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver's display. The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Driving and parking 191 Starting the vehicle ▌Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements R The key is in the vehicle and is detected. Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch off nonessential consumer equipment and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears on the driver's display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 191). % You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button 1 for about three seconds or press button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (/ page 194). Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display. # # ▌Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. # # # Make sure that cup holder 2 is empty. Remove key 1 from the key ring. Place key 1 in cup holder 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key 1 from cup holder 2, the vehicle can be driven. For further vehicle 192 Driving and parking # starts, however, key 1 must be located in cup holder 2 during the entire journey. Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: # Leave key 1 in cup holder 2. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. % You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display. Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services ▌Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R R R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. The fuel tank is sufficiently full. The starter battery is sufficiently charged. ▌Charging the starter battery before starting the journey You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. ▌Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. Driving and parking 193 # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows: R Using the smartphone app R By pressing the Ü or s button on the key % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R No faster than 85 mph (140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive mode A or ;. R Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shift down manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R Increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed only after 1000 miles (1500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is reached only when this teaching-in process has concluded. R Brake pads, brake disks and tires that are either new or have been replaced achieve optimum braking effect and grip only after several hundred kilometers. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimizing acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. 194 Driving and parking Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 223). Pulling away with optimized acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and accidents due to the wheels spinning If you pull away using optimized acceleration, individual wheels can spin and the vehicle can skid. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents, especially when ESP® is switched off! # Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # Requirements R the vehicle is run in (/ page 193). R the vehicle and tires are in good condition. R the roadway has a high-grip surface. R the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. # Engage the h drive position (/ page 207). Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. Select the C drive program (/ page 203). Deactivating ESP® (/ page 224). Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal. # # After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete. Ending optimized acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimized acceleration values may only be reached again after a few minutes. # Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. Driving and parking 195 This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. # & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the vehicle while driving. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running. 196 Driving and parking # Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alcohol and drugs while driving Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the overrevving range. * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. # Do not depress the brake pedal continuously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 197 * NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. % Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance. Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should therefore bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data. R Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 140). R Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking. R Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle traveling in front. Remove salt build-up as follows: R Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed 198 Driving and parking R R R Avoid tire ruts Avoid sudden steering movements Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 396). Notes on driving through water on the road Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you have to drive through water: R The water, when calm, may reach no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a walking pace at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. Function of rear axle steering The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering. Rear axle steering has the following characteristics: R reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort R improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering R more direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode (/ page 397). ECO start/stop function ▌ECO start/stop function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the driver's display concerning this. The engine will be switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. Driving and parking 199 % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine will restart automatically in the following cases: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R The vehicle requires an automatic engine start. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è symbol nor the ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the driver's display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes. ▌Switching the ECO start/stop function on/off # Press button 1. A display will appear on the driver's display when you switch the ECO start/stop function on/off. 200 Driving and parking % s will be continuously shown on the driver's display while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated. ECO display function The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange. The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style: R Coasting at the right times R Consistent speed R Moderate acceleration The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars 1. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the background. % You can call up the ECO Display function via the Classic and Maybach menus (/ page 287). ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system) % ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A. ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient. If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This is especially the case if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short. Driving and parking 201 The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the following cases: R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time. R You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front). R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead. 1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation 2 Route event ahead If a route event ahead or a vehicle driving in front is detected which requires an adjustment to your driving style to ensure greater efficiency, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý symbol (gray) will be displayed. If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you end ECO Assist's control. In addition to a vehicle in front ¥, ECO Assist can detect the following route events 2 depending on the vehicle's equipment: ~ Traffic circle ¡ S-curve ¢ Sharp curve £ T-intersection ¤ Downhill gradient ¦ Speed limit % In drive program A, ECO Assist only reacts to the route event "Vehicle in front". System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windshield is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera. R If the multifunction camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. 202 Driving and parking R R R R R R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. When you drive on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. DYNAMIC SELECT button Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change between the following drive programs: The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display. = Individual R Individual settings (/ page 203) R B Sport+ R Very sporty driving with lowered suspension R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for an even more active driving style R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road R C Sport R The maximum drive output is available R Sporty driving with lowered suspension R Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability R Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability Recommended for all road conditions N Curve Available only for vehicles with E‑ACTIVE BODY CONTROL R Comfortable driving with curve tilting function R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions £ Maybach Maximum driving comfort for comfortable and luxurious travel R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions R % The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics: R Drive Driving and parking 203 Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Availability of Glide mode ESP® Vehicles with AIRMATIC: suspension Suspension and damping Vehicle level Steering - Selecting the drive program - R R R Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I # Select = Individual. # Select and set a category. # Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right. The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display. Switching the reset display on/off # Activate or deactivate Request at Start. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. 204 Driving and parking % The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically. Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS (plugin hybrid and electric vehicles) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I # Select = Individual. # Select and set a category. Switching the reset display on/off # Activate or deactivate Request at Start. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. The drive program for the respective user profile of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. % The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set automatically. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or countryspecific guidelines). Variables that can influence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine Adjust your driving style accordingly. The p warning lamp in the driver's display is on until the engine has reached operating temperature. Driving and parking 205 % The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the central display may deviate from the actual values. % The p warning lamp to show the power output limitation after starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models. Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ▌Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. 206 Driving and parking Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the driver's display. ▌Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. ▌Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. j k i h Park position Reverse gear Neutral Drive position Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is at a standstill. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch off the vehicle. The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P message appears in the driver's display. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. The park position j is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met: R You switch to transmission position h or k. R You press the button j. ▌Engaging park position P * NOTE Damage due to engaging park position j while the vehicle is rolling If you shift the transmission into park position j while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged. # If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door. # Only engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Driving and parking 207 Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 212). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If the transmission position display j does not appear, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position h or k. # R R R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position h or k and bring it to a standstill. When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position i, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary. Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle. R The driving speed Manual gearshifting * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. ▌Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmission position h, it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel paddle shifter. If permitted, the automatic transmission will shift to a higher or 208 Driving and parking lower gear depending on the steering wheel paddle shifter being pulled. You have two options for manually shifting the automatic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1 or 2. Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission position display will show p and the current gear. % How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various factors. Manual shifting can be deactivated automatically in the following cases: R When the drive program is changed R When the vehicle is restarted R When transmission position h is engaged again Driving style To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1. # To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter 2. The transmission position display will show h. % You can also activate or deactivate manual shifting permanently in the multimedia system. R Gearshift recommendation # The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. Permanently activating or deactivating manual gearshifting # Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving # Permanently activate or deactivate the function. If gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear. Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance. To protect against excessively high engine speeds, the automatic transmission will shift up to the Driving and parking 209 next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. Glide mode function With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and is still running in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode will be activated if the following conditions are met: R Drive program £ is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in drive program =. Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation Function of 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, 210 Driving and parking and leave them switched off during refueling. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 211 * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements R The vehicle is unlocked. Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. Refuel only with fuel that has at least the octane rating specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output may be reduced and fuel consumption increased. 1 2 3 4 5 Fuel filler flap Bracket for fuel filler cap Tire pressure table QR code for rescue card Fuel type # Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap 1. Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. # 212 Driving and parking # # # # # Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle switches off. Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. Close fuel filler flap 1. Parking Parking the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. # # Apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. R In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # # # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away. Driving and parking 213 Engage transmission position j in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed (/ page 206). # Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. # When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body. Garage door opener # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal. On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. ▌Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. 214 Driving and parking # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing function R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. Requirements R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. % The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Driving and parking 215 # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. ▌Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # ▌Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 5. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. 216 Driving and parking % It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even after you have successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline. % Support and additional information on programming: R on the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R online at the https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes ▌Opening or closing a garage door Requirements R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously pressed button again and keep it pressed until the door opens or closes. ▌Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. # Electric parking brake ▌Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically) & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The vehicle is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 217). Driving and parking 217 In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: The vehicle is switched off. The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insufficient. The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display. % The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. ▌Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: You shift from transmission position j. or - You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. ▌Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying 218 Driving and parking Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp is lit continuously. # Releasing # Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. ▌Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display. Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on and collision detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, forexample, in a two-storey garage. % Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system (/ page 219). % If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following situations: R the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R an impact occurs at low speed R the electric parking brake is not applied % You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy. Driving and parking 219 Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate the function via Collision Notification. % A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already. Activating or deactivating the collision photos function Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings. # Activate or deactivate Collision Photos. Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me app # Select Upload Collision Photos. # Select Upload Automatically. Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me app. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me. % Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me app. # Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive # Connect a USB flash drive . # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive. % To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. Deleting collision photos # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use) ▌Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-operation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display. R The connection to online services is interrupted. 220 Driving and parking If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time has to be extended. R The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. ▌Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle) Requirements R The power supply is switched on. R The vehicle is not switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other Functions # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems that assist you in driving, parking and maneuvering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. % Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. Driving and parking 221 5 Corner radars 6 Ultrasonic sensors 7 Rear view camera & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. 1 2 3 4 Multifunction camera Cameras in the outside mirrors Front radar Front camera Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 368). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If a bumper or the radiator grill is damaged or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R R R R R ABS (/ page 222) BAS (/ page 223) ESP® (/ page 223) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 224) EBD (/ page 225) 222 Driving and parking R R R R R R R R STEER CONTROL (/ page 225) HOLD function (/ page 225) Hill Start Assist (/ page 226) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 226) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 246) Traffic light view (/ page 249) AIRMATIC (/ page 258) E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (/ page 260) Driving Assistance Package % The availability of some functions or sub-functions of the Driving Assistance Package is equipment- or country-specific. The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from the functions listed here. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 233) R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 234) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 242) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 238) R R R R R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239) Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 235) Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255) PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 51) Parking Package % The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment. R 360° camera (/ page 263) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 267) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 270) R Remote Parking Assist (/ page 275) R Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 282) Functions of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum fullstop braking or if there is insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started. R Driving and parking 223 Function of BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. 224 Driving and parking Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 501) R Display messages (/ page 439) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 203). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu. # Select ESP. # Select On or Off. Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the driver's display. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver's display. ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual brake application on one side. Driving and parking 225 Function of EBD R Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. R Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the following situations: R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R the vehicle starts to skid System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. ESP® is malfunctioning. The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. HOLD function ▌HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. ▌Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. Requirements R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. 226 Driving and parking R R R The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the driver's display. # Release the brake pedal. # Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë display disappears from the driver's display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. R The transmission is shifted to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated. # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away. Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when you pull away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. ATTENTION ASSIST ▌Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in Driving and parking 227 time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. If fatigue or increasing inattention is detected, the warning appears in the driver display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!. you can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If the driver display shows a warning, a service area search is offered in the multimedia system. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. The following information is displayed in the driver's display: R The length of the journey since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: The more segments 1 of the circle displayed, the higher the detected attention level. - Fewer segments 1 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) and above. If the system is not available due to an error, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning light is permanently lit Û in the driver display Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST functions only in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active. 228 Driving and parking R R R If the clock is set to the incorrect time. If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations. if ESP® is not available Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver's display. The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R You switch off the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). ▌Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST Setting the sensitivity # Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST. # Select Standard or Sensitive. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ▌Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance will be maintained, until the vehicle comes to a standstill if necessary. The vehicle will accelerate or brake depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 100 mph (160 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h) % The adjustable set speed may differ if a limit speed (e.g. winter tire limit) is stored. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (/ page 202) R R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent) % It is possible to set the driving mode of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC on the DYNAMIC SELECT menu. Depending on which drive program is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, comfort or dynamic performance. The driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic on the Active Distance Assist menu (/ page 235). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front Driving and parking 229 when it drives off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when the vehicle drives off, such as a person in the path of the vehicle, a visual and acoustic warning will be given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle will not be accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance will be maintained, until the vehicle comes to a standstill if necessary. The vehicle will accelerate or brake depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist is available in the speed range from 15 mph (20 km/h) 130 mph (210 km/h). Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (/ page 202) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) R Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country-dependent) Additional function available in certain countries: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when it drives off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when the vehicle drives off, such as a person in the path of the vehicle, a visual and acoustic warning will be given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle will not be accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready to drive when the green ç vehicle symbol flashes cyclically. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). Display on the driver's display on the Assistance menu 1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance 230 Driving and parking A vehicle detected in front 1 will be highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, such as on highways. Permanent status display R ç (grey): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active R ç (green speedometer, white vehicle): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set R ç (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected The stored speed will be shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display will be greyed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments on the speedometer will light up. When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the Ò display will briefly appear under the vehicle on the permanent status display. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol will be displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode. The following message will appear briefly on the driver's display ç Suspended. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or obscured. R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. R In parking garages or on roads with steep gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. Driving and parking 231 # # Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. & WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic R R R R The transmission is in position h. All the doors are closed. Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Snow chain mode is not active (/ page 397). As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. ▌Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 232 Driving and parking 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the specified distance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel. Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press H. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or # To activate with a stored speed: pressJ. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle. If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. Increasing or reducing the speed To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Briefly press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. # Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver's display # Activate the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: Press M, N or J. # Accept the displayed speed limit: press J. The limit speed displayed in the driver's display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits its speed accordingly. % A speed limit shown in the driver display is adopted only while the vehicle is in motion, not when stationary. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Driving and parking 233 Reducing or increasing the specified distance from the vehicle in front # Press K. The h display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. # Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. ▌Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 235). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not accepted. The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver's display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) is adopted. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traffic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 246). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. 234 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer # # Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. ▌Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 235). The following route events are taken into account: R Bends R Traffic circles R T-intersections R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic ) Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning at intersections R Driving in slowing-down lanes R Driving in lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, traffic circles and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, forexample: R The road's course is not clearly visible. R Road narrowing. R Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example at toll stations. R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice. Driving and parking 235 In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: R If the driver does not follow the calculated route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation. ▌Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles Requirements R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist Selecting a driving style # Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable. % Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231). Setting speed adaptation # Select Adopt Speed Limit or Route-based Speed. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on a route event ahead or a speed limit. % When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Variable limiter % Further information on speed adaptation (/ page 234). ▌Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. 236 Driving and parking Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a traffic jam on a highway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 231). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 238). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the ¬ status display appears on the driver's display. System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 236). Active Steering Assist ▌Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is available only up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the center of the lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. Permanent status display in the driver's display Ø Gray: activated and passive Ø Green: activated and active Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the driver's display. Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Driving and parking 237 If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an optical warning is given first. Display 1 appears in the driver's display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initiated (/ page 238). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. The touch detection may be limited or may not function if there is no direct contact between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R R R R R R Insufficient road illumination. The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or intersections. The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, suchas object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On very tight bends and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At traffic circles or toll stations. 238 Driving and parking R R When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indicator. When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. If Active Steering Assist is switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 37 mph (60 km/h). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sensors to monitor whether the driver holds the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary. If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane. Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following warnings in order: R Display message 1 appears in the driver's display. R In addition to display 1 a warning tone sounds. R The message Initiating Emergency Stop will appear in the driver's display, a continuous warning tone will sound, the vehicle will no longer accelerate and, if necessary, slight belt tensioning will be produced. Driving and parking 239 R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also produced. % Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens the seat belt and driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated immediately. Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possible. When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depending on the country, the hazard warning light system is switched on. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering. You can cancel the intervention by Active Emergency Stop Assist after automatic braking is initiated by one of the following actions: R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is canceled, but the warning message, warning tone and power steering remain active R Steering: power-assisted steering is canceled, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked % Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled until the vehicle has been restarted. System limits For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles, observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 242) Active Lane Change Assist ▌Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver during lanes changes and the driver can activate it by indicating briefly. Active Lane Change Assist is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention. It is essential that you observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility in the vehicle Operator's Manual; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers. The following conditions must be fulfilled for a lane change: R You are on a highway or high-speed major road. R The vehicle speed is between approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R The neighboring lane is separated by a broken lane marking. R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane. 240 Driving and parking R R R Since the last time the vehicle was started, the sensors have detected a vehicle at a suitable distance behind your vehicle. Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activated on highways. Driver display on the Assistance menu The system is not available and must be reactivated in the following situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were already activated before you entered the highway. R The system briefly does not detect the road you are on as a highway or a highway-like road, e.g. at a highway intersection. As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road, you can reactivate it with J, M or N. 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change canceled When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the ± display will appear along with green arrows on the driver display. If the system has been activated but is not currently available, the ± dis- play will appear along with grey arrows on the driver display. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change will begin after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change will be shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 will be displayed in the appropriate adjacent lane on the Assistance menu on the driver's display. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, will also appear. Active Lane Change Assist can be canceled in various situations, including the following: R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g. detected obstacle). R The driver removes both hands from the steering wheel. R The driver steers with too much force or in the opposite direction. R The driver activates the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction. Driving and parking 241 R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated. The vehicle cannot make the lane change as planned. Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is displayed as follows: R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. R A corresponding message appears on the driver display. R In certain circumstances, a warning tone will sound. & WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R R R R R R R R R Due to insufficient illumination of the road, or if the exterior lighting indicates a malfunction. The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or obscured in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. The sensors are damaged, obscured or dirty. The lane markings for one lane are either absent or unclear, or the markings change quickly, such as in a construction area or at intersections. The system does not detect a suitable road, for example, on tight bends or shortly after a on/off ramp. The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. The distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The tire pressure is too low. 242 Driving and parking Also observe the system limits of Active Steering Assist and the information on vehicle sensors and cameras in the vehicle Operator's Manual. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors will adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist will be unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows will be displayed next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol. ▌Setting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Aktiver Spurwechsel-Assistent (Active Lane Change Assist) # Select Aktiver Spurwechsel-Assistent (Active Lane Change Assist). # Choose between the On, Also Automatically and Off (Off) setting options. The Also Automatically setting option can also be switched on and off on the quick-access menu. % If Active Steering Assist has been switched off, it will not be possible to operate Aktiver Spurwechsel-Assistent (Active Lane Change Assist). Active Brake Assist ▌Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Collision warning R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent brake force boosting R Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific) Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone will sound and the L distance warning lamp will light up. On the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance 1 to the vehicle in front will be displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front will also be highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves 2 will appear in front of the vehicle. % Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning will occur in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning will also be accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 168). Driving and parking 243 If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone and the L distance warning lamp will occur at the same time as brake application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting will occur. The brake pressure will increase up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, pop up 1 will appear on the driver's display and then automatically disappear after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situation-dependent brake force boosting is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the ê Active Brake Assist warning lamp will appear on the driver's display. If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions are restricted, the Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp will appear on the driver's display. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: Collision warning Collision warning can assist you in the following situations from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) with an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning will occur in the 244 Driving and parking form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists R R R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists Situation-dependent brake force boosting Situation-dependent brake force boosting can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists Canceling brake application by Active Brake Assist You can cancel brake application by Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or activating kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R you maneuver to avoid the obstacle R there is no longer a risk of collision R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle Reaction to oncoming road users Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users: R Reaction up to speeds of approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) Driving and parking 245 R R Warning for oncoming road users via acoustic warning and distance warning lamp L Autonomous brake application in order to reduce the severity of an accident Evasive Steering Assist & WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. # End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. # Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics: R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if a swerving maneuver is detected. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately 13 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approximately 68 mph (110 km/h). You can cancel assistance from Evasive Steering Assist at any time by countersteering. System limits Full system performance will not be available for a short time after you switch the vehicle on or after you drive off. As long as the functions are restric- ted, the Æ Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown on the driver's display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available. The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or obscured. (/ page 220) R If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. intense radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations in which objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection area. R If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects. 246 Driving and parking R R R R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the background. If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. On tight bends % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the driver's display, and the system is reactivated the next time the vehicle is started. Setting the time of the warnings Select Z next to Active Brake Assist. # Select Early, Medium or Late. # ▌Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance # Activate or deactivate the function. % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the distance warning function, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. Traffic Sign Assist ▌Function of Traffic Sign Assist The traffic sign assistant detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares them with the information on the digital road map of the navigation system. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the driver's display and in the head-up display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed. In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyzes traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in the driver's display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the driver's display. Also observe the following information: R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions R observe actual traffic signs R observe applicable traffic rules and regulations Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). Driving and parking 247 Displays in the driver's display R R R R R Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver display, e.g. in the case of detected restrictions, the value of the left speed limit 1 is always transmitted to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for acceptance and shown in the head-up display. Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display following traffic signs 1: R speed limits R end of the speed limit R overtaking restrictions R play streets R recommended speeds Traffic Sign Assist can detect following additional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: R when wet slippery road surfaces in fog temporary restrictions exits restrictions for car/trailer combinations Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a freeway exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a intersection, the display on the driver's display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected. % Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system so that the traffic sign assistant can work optimally. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the currently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display: 248 Driving and parking Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously. % Please also note the information on the display messages of the traffic sign assistant (/ page 439). Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific) Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a section of road, forexample on freeway slip roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, forexample if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs are detected. Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally. The following conditions must be fulfilled: R Several traffic lights have been detected. R All traffic lights detected are red. R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane. R The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green. % If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warnings (/ page 249). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R if the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted. R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, suchas transmission frequency. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. Driving and parking 249 R R R R R if the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights if the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard if the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them. ▌Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist Activating or deactivating the speed warning # Switch off Speed Limit Warning. The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the driver's door is opened. Change the type of speed warning # Change the warning to Visual only or Visual and acoustic. Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist # Switch further warning contents on or off. The available functions are switched on or off. Set the type of warning for other functions Select Visual only or Visual and acoustic. # Traffic light view ▌Information about the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off. ▌Displaying traffic light view Requirements: R The Traffic Light View option is switched on. R A traffic light view is available. 250 Driving and parking Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out. # Activate D or deactivate E Traffic Light View. Using other available functions # Select Z. # Select On Request or Automatic. If On Request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available. Traffic Light Information service & WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view when approaching a traffic light and when changing lanes. # Avoid looking at the Instrument Display and Head-up Display for a long time. The traffic light icon and countdown of remaining time until the next green phase are shown in the driver display. Example view on the driver's display 1 Traffic light icon and countdown of remaining time until the next green phase time The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection % The direction arrows are displayed depending on the following functions: R A turn signal is set Driving and parking 251 R A lane is recommended during active route guidance If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to MercedesBenz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwarded to the provider of the traffic light information service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not permanently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % This traffic light information service is only available in certain cities and regions. The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communication module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The traffic light information service is within the scope of the navigation service. The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traffic light information service provider. The provider gathers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an inter-section with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal left or right and lane recommendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, systems or components. Please note that the displayed data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situation. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The driver's display is shown after selecting the Assistancemenu . If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regulations 252 Driving and parking Please observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. System limits The display does not appear in the following situations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a construction site area or are being maintained. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired. Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ▌Function of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver's display ¸ Gray: the system is activated but inoperative. ¸ Green: the system is activated and operational. Driver display in the Assistance menu If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror 1 also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds twice and the warning lamp flashes red in the respective outside mirror. Red radar waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic. Driving and parking 253 If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Blind Spot Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 168). Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following: R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area R if vehicles traveling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave the stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the corresponding outside mirror flash red. Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves into the area of the door. % Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: theWarning Support of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated (/ page 168). % The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting. The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a few minutes. When the outside mirror warning light flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available. 254 Driving and parking The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants. System limits Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a prolonged time. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects ▌Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and approximately 125 mph (200 km/h). & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display Driving and parking 255 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. ▌Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Blind Spot Assist # Select Active Blind Spot Assist. # Select On or Off. Active Lane Keeping Assist ▌Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera (/ page 220) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system can intervene in the following situations: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur. 256 Driving and parking markings or only continuous lane markings (/ page 257). Display 1 will appear in the driver's display and a warning tone will sound in the following situations: R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds. R The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver. In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. If ESP® is deactivated or a tire pressure loss warning is displayed, Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically deactivated. ï Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages. ð Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating. ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corresponding side. ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a coursecorrecting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning. Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's display. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 168). Driving and parking 257 System limits In the following situations, a lane-correcting steering intervention may not occur but rather a warning may be given on the steering wheel, depending on the situation: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R R R R R R If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the radar sensors, or if they are damaged or covered. If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. If the road is very narrow and winding. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 220). ▌Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function. Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via the quick vehicle access y. % After starting the vehicle, the settings are country-specific. ▌Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity # Select Z. # Select Early, Med. or Late. 258 Driving and parking The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. Activating or deactivating assistance on discontinuous lane markings # Select Advanced Support. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. % This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 238) AIRMATIC ▌Function of AIRMATIC * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The allround level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions: R air suspension with automatic all-round level control R speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R R increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia system ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) Suspension setting depending on the drive program Drive program C and B: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. Drive program A R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to normal level. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h). Driving and parking 259 R R When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to normal level. Drive program £ R The suspension setting is very comfortable. R The vehicle is set to normal level. R When driving at speeds above approximately 87 mph (140 km/h), the vehicle is lowered. R When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again. ▌Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). 260 Driving and parking R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y Raising the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to high level +1. Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Lowering the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. % In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ▌Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension set- ting is adjusted depending on the road surface, vehicle load and the drive program selected. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements. The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors: R Driving style, e.g. sporty R Road condition, e.g. bumps R Drive program E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components: R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: ROAD SURFACE SCAN R Curve inclination function CURVE R Air suspension with automatic level control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R ADS PLUS: Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics Driving and parking 261 R R DYNAMIC SELECT button for selecting a drive program (/ page 203) Manual level adjustment via the multimedia system Drive program C and B R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above approx. 75 mph (120 km/h). R When driving at speeds below approx. 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. Drive program A, N and £ R A and N: the suspension setting is comfortable. R £: the suspension setting is very comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R R R R R R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h). When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. N and £: the curve inclination function is active. ▌Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN % This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using a multifunction camera (/ page 220). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chassis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met: R No raised vehicle level is set. R You are driving at a speed between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). System limits ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning: R If the road is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the road surface has no optic structure or reflects light. R If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front. R If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature. 262 Driving and parking R During abrupt driving maneuvers, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration. Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera (/ page 368). ▌Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y Raising the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1. Your selection is saved. Off-road level+1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off. Driving and parking 263 The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). Lowering the vehicle # Select t. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. % In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). 360° camera Menu overview Camera Views ▌Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, forexample, or at exits with reduced visibility. The 360° Camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors The cameras are only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. 1 Parking Assistance menu 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with image from the rear view cam- era 4 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle 5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 6 3D auto view 264 Driving and parking 7 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist 3 Driven surface depending on the current % In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (/ page 267). % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 270). PARKTRONIC (/ page 269) 8 To set the GPS activation point (/ page 267) 9 To switch between standard and wide-angle view steering angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area Top view with image from the front or rear view camera Function of the guide lines 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 267) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Driving and parking 265 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle * NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all. # Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking. In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted. rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch. 3D auto view % The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views. Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 267) 2 Guide lines 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 267) In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the (/ page 267) 2 To switch between standard and wide-angle view 266 Driving and parking System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears in the central display. The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. % Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 368). ▌Calling up the 360° camera views using the button # # # Press button 1. Select the Camera Views menu. Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 263). Driving and parking 267 ▌Selecting a view for the 360° camera (reverse gear) # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 263). ▌360° camera with GPS - managing activation positions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera Renaming an activation position % You can determine activation positions in the Camera Views menu. (/ page 263) # Select u for the desired activation position. # Select Edit. # Enter a name and confirm. The activation position is saved under the new name. Deleting an activation position Select u for the desired activation position. # Select Delete Entry. # Confirm the prompt. The activation position is deleted. # ▌Opening the camera cover Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ▌Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. 268 Driving and parking Displays in the central display R R As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Front and rear ready for display 2 All sides ready for display 3 All sides ready for display and obstacle detected The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m) Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft (0.4 m) Red: <1.2 ft (0.4 m) The boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of detected obstacles. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 ft (0.4 m). If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, popup window 1 appears in the central display if the following requirements are met: R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). Driving and parking 269 R R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. Objects placed next to the vehicle Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it off. R You open the doors. Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on sides 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued. Also observe the system limits of the 360° Camera (/ page 263). Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 220). Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the é symbol appears in the driver's display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 368). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▌Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. 270 Driving and parking The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Press = in the central display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does not light up or the symbol é is displayed, PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. ▌Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking Adjusting warning tones Select Set Warning Tones. # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone Pitch. # Activating/deactivating audio fadeout # Audio Fadeout select and Audio Fade for Warnings switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone. or # Audio Fadeout select and Audio Fadeout When in R switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged. Setting the time of the warnings Select Time of Warning. # Activate or deactivate Side Warning. # Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear. # Active Parking Assist ▌Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system that uses ultrasound with the assistance of the 360° camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system will automatically measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following functions: R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or in reverse) R Parking in parking spaces that can be detected as such only due to markings (e.g. at the roadside) Driving and parking 271 R R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the road (optionally either left or right) Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals, objects etc. are in the path of the vehicle. If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç message will appear on the driver's display. When the system detects parking spaces, È will appear. The arrows show on which side of the road available parking spaces are located. These will then be shown on the central display. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators will be activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure will be assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press the c button (/ page 272). Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the following situations: R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You press the c button again. R You begin steering. R You engage park position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain ambient conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars may not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Use Active Parking Assist only on level, high-grip ground. System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist will not be available. Also observe the system limits of the 360° camera (/ page 263). Objects that are above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or boundaries of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These will also then not be taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. # 272 Driving and parking Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, snow or heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb. R On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%. ▌Parking with Active Parking Assist # # Press button 1 . Select Parking Assistance menu 2. Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central display. Driving and parking 273 # To start the parking procedure: press button 1 again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 4 into currently selected parking space 5 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. # If necessary, select another parking space. # To change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again. While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist Finished display message appears. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal stipulations or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled. Immediate parking via the Camera Views menu 274 Driving and parking Select the Camera Views menu. When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position k, and symbol 6 appears in the camera image: press button 1 again. The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space. % The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in immediate parking. The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill. # # ▌Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. # # Start the vehicle. Press button 1. # # # # Select Parking Assistance 2 menu. If necessary, change direction of exit 3. To start exiting the parking space: press button 1 again. If necessary, change the transmission position. Observe any messages displayed on the driver's display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. ▌Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample: # Depress the brake pedal. # Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood. Driving and parking 275 Apply the electric parking brake or activate the HOLD function. # To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal. % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure once more that there are no persons, animals or objects in the vehicle's path. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. # ▌Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the vehicle's path could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon- ger in the vehicle's path. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. Remote Parking Assist ▌Function of Remote Parking Assist % Remote Parking Assist is an additional function of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. If it is required to turn the wheels toward the curb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist. Please note that you can use Remote Parking Assist only if you have a valid driving license and are in a fit state to drive. Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits the parking space while you are outside of your vehicle. You can monitor the maneuvering and parking procedure on your mobile phone. With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist. You can also position the vehicle directly in front of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking space. Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away, braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked. Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no persons, animals, objects, etc. are in the maneuvering range. Make sure to also pay attention to other vehicles. System limits If the system detects a malfunction or a system limit during the maneuvering or parking procedure, the procedure will be canceled: R The vehicle is brought to a standstill. R Transmission position j is selected and the electric parking brake is applied automatically. R The vehicle is switched off. R The vehicle remains locked. If the parking maneuver is canceled, a corresponding message is displayed on the mobile phone. 276 Driving and parking Depending on the situation, you can then take control of the procedure, maneuver the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take control of the vehicle. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). Certain environmental conditions, suchas snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or to connection problems with the mobile phone. Only use Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 10 ft (3.0 m) away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure. ▌Operating Remote Parking Assist Requirements For the Remote Parking Assist function, you require: R a Mercedes me user account R R the current Remote Parking Assist App for your vehicle type a mobile phone % A list of compatible phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ The following operating systems are supported: R Android™ R Apple® iOS & WARNING Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings If you maneuver, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the following: # Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings. # Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle. # Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle and that neither # # you nor other road users could be endangered. Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify possible dangers. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. Always ensure that vehicle access by other road users is maintained. # Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage. # Authorize the mobile phone using the Remote Parking Assist App in the vehicle (/ page 278). Selecting the parking maneuver in advance while inside the vehicle # Stop the vehicle and select transmission position j. Driving and parking 277 % Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist (/ page 272) and continue with the Remote Parking Assist from any vehicle position. To do this, stop the parking process and adjust the gearbox setting j. # Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key. Starting the parking procedure without selecting in advance # Stop the vehicle and select transmission position j. # Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key. # Press button1. # # # # Select 2 Parking Assistance menu. For further information on Remote Parking Assist: select 3. If necessary, select another parking space 4 or select 5 to drive straight ahead into a garage, forexample. If necessary, change parking direction 6. Starting the parking procedure while outside the vehicle # Unlock the vehicle. Carrying out a parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist % Keep the vehicle key with you during the parking procedure. You can cancel the parking procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the key. % On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked. 278 Driving and parking If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited time. # Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the mobile phone and connect to the vehicle. # Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking Assist App. % The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when starting parking and switched off when it is completed. % If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking maneuver is being performed, the maneuver can be continued if the connection is reestablished within a short time. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist. # After ending the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the trunk are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Canceling the parking procedure You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to a standstill. # Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist App. or # Press a button on the vehicle key. or # Pull a door handle. ▌Authorizing/de-authorizing a mobile phone for Remote Parking Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking Authorizing a new mobile phone To be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorize your mobile phone. You can authorize up to ten mobile phones. # Select Remote Parking Assist. # Select Authorize a New Device in the window that opens. Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect. # Start the Remote Parking Assist app and additionally start the authorization process within it. A connection prompt is displayed. # Scan the QR code on the central display. The mobile phone is authorized. De-authorizing mobile phones # Select Remote Parking Assist. Driving and parking 279 # # # In the window that opens, select the device to be de-authorized. To de-authorize a mobile phone: select a mobile phone. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list. To de-authorize all mobile phones: selectDeauthorize All Devices. All mobile phones are deleted from the device list. Maneuvering assistance ▌Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when you are pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed will briefly be reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force. Drive Away Assist will be active in the following circumstances: R If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed to k or h. R If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a standstill. R If the detected obstacle is less than approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated on the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 281). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol will appear in red in the selected view on the Camera & Parkingmenu: % If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol will appear in grey. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will both appear. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals, objects etc. are in the path of the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action. 280 Driving and parking System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist will be restricted. ▌Function of cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when you are exiting a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. The cross traffic warning is active under the following conditions: R Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). R Warning for Cross Traffic, Front: the vehicle is driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera image is shown in the central display (/ page 266). The Warning for Cross Traffic, Front can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 281). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parkingmenu: Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear R The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected. R If the Camera & Parking menu is not open and a critical situation is detected, a warning appears in the central display together with the PARKTRONIC Parking Assist pop-up. Warning for Cross Traffic, Front R If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected. R If Active Parking Assist is not active but the menu Camera & Parking is open, a warning appears. R If the Camera & Parking menu is not open, the system cannot react to crossing traffic. The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals, objects, etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action. System limits % If the cross traffic warning is not available, the L symbol appears in gray. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 270). Driving and parking 281 If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. In the following situations, the cross traffic warning is not available: R on inclines ▌Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view camera detects a person in the vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown on the central display (/ page 266). You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 281). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parkingmenu: # # % If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone. Be ready to brake. System limits Observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 270) R 360° camera (/ page 263) The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines ▌Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking % This function is available on demand (/ page 27). # Select Maneuvering Assistance. 282 Driving and parking # Activate or deactivate the desired maneuvering assistant. Memory Parking Assist ▌Function of Memory Parking Assist Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 550 yds (500 m) (110 yds (100 m) per parking or exiting procedure). During parking or exiting, the system can travel a previously stored path of up to approximately 110 yds (100 m) to or out of the desired parking space, for example, from the driveway entrance into the garage. Within a radius of approx. 165 yds (150 m), only one parking or exiting procedure can be recorded. Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e. g. in public parking spaces, is not permitted. Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals, objects, etc. are in the maneuvering range. System limits Observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist (/ page 270). & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Memory Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This result in a collision. # In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist. Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist may not be detected during the parking procedure. Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects, that protrude into the parking space may not be detected. Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following situations, for example: R In extreme weather conditions suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. ▌Recording a parking procedure using Memory Parking Assist Requirements R The entire route is, forexample, within your own property and not on public roads. R The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself, suchas fences, walls or trees. Therefore, after starting the vehicle, a certain distance must first be driven. If not enough reference points are detected in the Driving and parking 283 surrounding area, no new route can be recorded. Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). # To stop recording: Stop the vehicle and tap on 3 again. The recording is stored. % In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename stored parking procedures. # ▌Parking with Memory Parking Assist Requirements R A parking procedure has been recorded. # # # # Press button1. The Camera & Parking view opens in the central display. # Select 2 Memory Parking Assist menu. Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the assisted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance. To start recording: tap on 3. % If not all conditions for a recording are met, symbol 3 is grayed out. Press button 1. The Camera & Parking view opens in the central display. 284 Driving and parking # Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. % The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. # After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. ▌Exiting a parking space with Memory Parking Assist # # # # Select Memory Parking Assist 2 menu. Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored parking procedure. To start the parking procedure: press6. Select the stored parking procedure from the list. Requirements R The exiting procedure was recorded together with the respective parking procedure and stored separately within one driving cycle. R The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist. # # Press button 1. The Camera & Parking view opens in the central display. Select Memory Parking Assist 2 menu. Starting the exiting procedure Press 6. # Confirm the saved exiting procedure. # Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives the recorded route. # % The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Take control of the vehicle after the exiting procedure has been completed. ▌Setting Memory Parking Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking 5 Memory Parking Assist Renaming a recording # Select Manage Lanes. # Select u next to the desired recording. # Enter a name and confirm with OK. Driving and parking 285 Deleting a recording # Select Manage Lanes. # Select u next to the desired recording. # Select Delete Entry. Deleting all recordings # Select Manage Lanes. # Select u next to one of the desired recordings. # Select Delete All. % Alternatively, you can delete all data for Memory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia system (/ page 319). Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 385) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 386) 286 Driver's display Notes on the driver's display & WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The driver's display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant temperature as well as indicator and warning lamps. Additional functions available include the following: R Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navigation R R R Status displays for the driving systems Display messages Information on speed, Consumption and range Some menu content and settings can be customized. Notes on the 3D driver's display The 3D driver's display enables a three-dimensional representation of the content of the driver's display. This requires the driver to be recorded by the driver camera. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The driver camera is deactivated or is not working. R The driver is outside the detection range of the driver camera. R The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high. Operating the driver's display & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display. Driver's display 287 Scrolling on the menu bar one finger. Confirm your selection by pressing the Touch Control. % To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display . # Briefly press main menu button 2. # Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3. # To confirm: press Touch Control 3. Driver display menus Notes on menus on the driver's display 1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control The content on the driver's display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. You can use Touch Control 3 to navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display. The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver's display: R Understated R Sport R Maybach R Classic R Navigation R Assistance R Service On some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the center display area. 288 Driver's display In most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content. You can find further information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. Head-up Display Function of the head-up display The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example. You can use the head-up display menu bar to select various contexts, e.g.: R Minimal R Sport R Standard R Augmented reality R ECO display (depending on model and equipment) (/ page 200) R Settings R Head-up display on/off % Depending on the equipment, the functions may differ from the description and images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. The following image shows an example of the head-up display. You can choose what content is displayed (/ page 290). 4 Current speed 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) Head-up display with navigation and augmented reality (10x5°) Head-up display content with navigation (6x2°) 1 Navigation instructions 2 Augmented reality navigation instructions 3 Navigation status displays, such as remaining 1 Detected instructions and traffic signs 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event) 3 Steer Assist status distance to the destination, expected time of arrival 4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status 5 Steer Assist status 6 Current speed Driver's display 289 7 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) 8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist) When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting message will appear on the head-up display and the driver's display. System limits Visibility is particularly influenced by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses Function of the head-up display with augmented reality % Augmented reality is available only in conjunction with the 10x5° head-up display. The head-up display with augmented reality projects content into the driver's field of vision, such as: R Information from and visualization of the navigation system R Information from and visualization of the driver assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Information from the menus of the driver's display Head-up display with augmented reality (example) 1 Marker for the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) 2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route (navigation) 3 Driver assistance system status bar The marker for the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The changeof-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system. 290 Driver's display System limits The marker for the detected vehicle in front may be inaccurate or may not be applied to the correct vehicle in some situations. Always pay attention to the actual driving situation. Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitized. Visibility is influenced by conditions including the following: R Driver camera and multifunction camera recording R The extent to which the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured Further system limits of the head-up display (/ page 288). To confirm: press the a button. Operating the head-up display # Selecting display content of the head-up display via the menu bar of the driver's display # Press the ò main menu button on the left. # To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Switching back to the driver's display # Press the G or ò button. Switching between display content on the headup display # Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up display. Setting the position and brightness # Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select Settings on the menu bar of the head-up display. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graphics on the head-up display as well as on the driver's display. # To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically. # Press the G or a button to exit the settings. Driver's display 291 % Vehicles with augmented reality function: when the position is adjusted, the status line will be moved upwards and the display section made smaller. This may slightly affect the area on which the augmented reality content is displayed. Selecting the head-up display with augmented reality # # # Press the main menu button ò on the left. To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To select the head-up display with augmented reality: swipe to the left or right on the lefthand Touch Control to activate the desired content. Switching the head-up display on/off Driver's display: 4 © Switching on # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. Switching off Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Swipe on the left-hand Touch Control and select Head-up Display. # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. # Setting the Head-up Display in the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y Switching the 3D display for the driver display on or off # Select 3D Driver Display. The 3D display of the driver display is switched on or off. % The 3D display for the driver display is only activated when the driver camera detects the driver. Otherwise, the driver display switches from the 3D display to the 2D display (/ page 286). Switching the Head-up Display on/off # Select Head-up Display. The Head-up Display is activated or deactivated. 292 Driver's display Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system 1 Electric drive support 2 Recuperation behavior of the electric motor % Due to various system limits, the values displayed may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value. Overview of status displays on the driver's display The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections 1 to 4. Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display) Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 272) È Active Parking Assist has recognized a parking space (/ page 272) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 269) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 228) æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 246) Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 246) Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 236) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 239) ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 255) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (/ page 254) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 198) ë HOLD function (/ page 225) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 164) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 165) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 235) Ò Slippery road surface warning Driver's display 293 Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 246) 294 MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may differ from the description and images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants. Overview of the MBUX multimedia system * NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot. # If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience. • Operates Touch Control 2 Central display with touch functionality • Home screen overview • Operates the touchscreen 3 Switch panel with: ú Fingerprint sensor Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off MBUX multimedia system 295 a Switches sound on or off ø Adjusts the volume Further operating options: R Conducting a dialog with the MBUX voice assistant. R Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant. The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements. % You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on anti-theft protection can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Zero layer ▌Function of the zero layer % Your software can be upgraded to a more current version at a later date. The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use. When you select © on the central display, the digital map with the applications appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu. The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again. The zero layer provides the following modules and applications: R Navigation module In the expanded view you can, for example, display the route overview, switch on the display of traffic information and make settings R R R for View (map), Messages & Acoustic Signals, Route. Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are always displayed. A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be displayed. Active applications The lower display area shows an active massage program, for example. Suggestions Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context and your user behavior. Here are a few examples: Latest calls Active massage programs Vehicle functions Online voice applications The applications are first displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view). 296 MBUX multimedia system A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions are available. The learning function can be switched on and off for the options . ▌Overview zero layer Digital map and user-specific applications (example) 4 5 6 7 1 Navigation module (reduced view) 2 Enters a destination The zero layer shows the digital map and the userspecific applications. The following user-specific applications are displayed in the lower display area: R Suggestions Searching for parking 3 Calls up the Control Center (pull the bar down) Status line Calls up user profile settings Content sharing menu Telephone Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system. 8 Entertainment sources (media, radio) 9 © Press briefly: shows all applications (/ page 298) Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu A Route monitor e.g. route list, lane recommendations, toll stations, 3D image of the upcoming driving maneuver MBUX multimedia system 297 R R R R Requirement: suggestions are activated (/ page 313). Active applications e.g. a massage program Telephone 7 Entertainment sources 8 Online voice applications The lower display area can be hidden and shown (/ page 298). Information about entertainment sources You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expanded view) (/ page 298). Examples: R Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station R Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list R Select a media source The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system. Information about the telephone To use the functions, the mobile phones must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system. Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & Messages option is activated in the suggestions. Examples: R Answer a call and call a missed call The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system. R Display contacts and call list and call a contact R Use voice functions R Suggest contacts The contacts are suggested for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for the mobile phones that are linked to another user profile. R Write messages to contacts (suggestion) R Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion) Information about active applications The following functions are available: R Operating the massage program R Raising or lowering the vehicle level Suggestions for comfort and vehicle functions as well as navigation Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the suggestions. R Operating the massage program For example, the multimedia system suggests a program at a certain time. R Opening the trunk lid Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with trunk lid convenience closing. R Opening and closing the convenience doors Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with comfort doors. R Setting the vehicle level R Making heating settings R Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 298 MBUX multimedia system R Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favorites Suggestions for online voice applications Requirement: the Online Voice Services option is activated in the suggestions. The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on your previous voice inputs. Examples: R What will the weather be like tomorrow? R Play the messages. R Start geoquiz. R Open the garage door. ▌Calling up and operating the zero layer Calling up the zero layer When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation is active. # From another application: press the © button on the right side of the steering wheel. or # Tap on ©. Operating applications in the reduced view (examples) # Media: to play the previous or next track, tap û or ü. # To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact. After the connection has been established, the call functions are available. # To end a call: tap on the contact again. # To reply to message: tap on a message and dictate the message via the MBUX Voice Assistant. # To start a massage program: tap on the application and start the massage program. # To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one of the previous destinations. # To select a destination from the favorites: tap on the application and select the destination. Hiding and showing the display area with applications # To hide: pull the applications down. # To show: pull the bar above © upwards. or # Select ©. or # Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right. MBUX multimedia system 299 Navigation module (expanded view) Operating a menu in the lower display area (example: active massage program) Opening and closing the context menu for a suggestion # Press and hold on a suggestion. The context menu opens and shows the No Longer Suggest option, for example. # To close: swipe downwards. Removing a suggestion from the display area # Swipe the suggestion upwards. 1 Selects a massage program 2 Starts/stops a massage program for the driver 3 Starts/stops a massage program for the front Example: route guidance is active 1 Destination 2 Searches for a gas station 3 Switches traffic information display on or off # # Tap on the navigation module (/ page 296). Select Route in the lower menu bar. passenger 4 Sets the massage program intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat # # Tap on the application. The expanded view of the application is displayed. To close the menu: select G. 300 MBUX multimedia system Showing all applications # # Press © briefly. Available applications are displayed. The global search is available. To hide applications: briefly press © again. Switching between zero layer and home screen with classic menu # Press and hold ©. The home screen with classic menu is shown. # To return to the zero layer: press and hold on ©. Home screen overview 1 Status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and switches 3 4 5 6 user Using the global search Calls up the Control Center: pull the bar down Calls up favorites Displays in the status line MBUX multimedia system 301 7 Calls up an application 8 Quick-access to application 9 Global menu Content sharing menu in the Control Center play) 6 MBUX rear tablet G Calls up previous menu © Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer û Previous track or previous radio station ü Next track or next radio station % During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global menu 9. The following functions are called up in the Control Center: R Notifications Center R Content sharing menu R Favorites R Vehicle quick-access 5 Rear displays with active content (cover dis- To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display. To control media playback, tap a display. Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control Example: showing displays 1 Calls up a menu 2 Central display with active content (cover dis- play) 3 Displays animation for content sharing 4 Ä Bluetooth® headphones connected to the right rear display 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control 302 MBUX multimedia system 3 4 5 6 7 8 =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) G Returns to the previous display 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call To increase volume: swipe upwards To reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switches off the sound: press ß Calls up favorites (press briefly) or adds favorites (press and hold) £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example: # To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Control 2. # To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Using the touchscreen 4 Adjusts the volume Press ± or q or swipe over the button # # # # # # # Example: Control elements under the central display 1 Fingerprint sensor 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off 3 Switches the mute function on/off # # To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry. To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger. To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers. To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button. To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. To turn the digital map: turn counter-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers. MBUX multimedia system 303 # # # # To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction. To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown. To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears. Function of the MBUX voice assistant & WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system: R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX voice assistant is operational approximately half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Radio and media R Vehicle functions R Online functions Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control. Conducting a dialog Starting a dialog Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX voice assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system. # 304 MBUX multimedia system or Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started. For the dialog with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice command, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". # # Calling up help # For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?" # Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the Operator's Manual". The full extent of the Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary. Operating functions (examples) # To operate the navigation: "Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South Manhattan." # To operate the phone: "Call my father." # # # # # To change the system language to English (short command): "Change language to English". To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations." To operate media: "Switch on random playback." To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2." To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?" To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?" Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant & WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24 June 2007. % The camera records image data for the applications, for example body, head and hand detection. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. % When you start the vehicle, the MBUX Interior Assistant is activated automatically. You can switch the Interior Assistant on or off. The setting is saved in your current user profile and is seat-specific. Via the user profile this is also available in other vehicles with the MBUX Interior Assistant. This means that you only have to make the setting once and can take it with you to the other vehicle. MBUX multimedia system 305 % You can switch the Interior Assistant front and rear camera on and off using Front and Rear . The selected camera settings (on/off) are not saved in the user profile and only apply to the current vehicle. If you change to another vehicle with the MBUX Interior Assistant, please check the settings and adjust them if necessary. The MBUX Interior Assistant is equipped with front and rear cameras. % Alternatively, a configuration with front camera only is also available. The front camera consists of two cameras that support the driver and the front passenger. The rear camera consists of two cameras that support the left and right rear seat passengers. The MBUX Interior Assistant records the vehicle occupants via 3D laser cameras. The cameras of the front camera are located in the overhead control panel. The cameras of the rear camera are located in the roof bows. The Assistant detects interactions of the vehicle occupants via the cameras. It interprets the natural hand, head and body movements of the vehi- cle occupants either in context or at their explicit request. The Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation. 1 Arrangement of the rear camera in the roof bows 1 Arrangement of the cameras of the front cam- era in the overhead control panel The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels: R INTELLIGENT The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions. R REACTIVE The Assistant recognizes the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation. R CONTACTLESS 306 MBUX multimedia system The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose. The Assistant offers functions for the following: SAFETY The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems. R COMFORT The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehicle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle. R INFOTAINMENT The vehicle occupants can carry out a favorite function with a hand pose. R System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The error messages are shown on the central display, for example. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The cameras may heat up during operation. As a result the cameras may switch off tempora- R R rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the cameras. Wait until the cameras have cooled down and are available again. The Interior Assistant Unavailable Further Information to Follow message appears. You receive a message when the camera is available again. The front or rear camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover. The Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears. Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of clothing) or objects carried on a person, for example a watch with a large face, are affecting the R R camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted. The Interior Assistant availability for the driver is limited, see Operator's Manual message appears. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. Objects in the detection range of the camera can restrict the camera view. Please make sure that no objects hang on the inside rearview mirror, for example. The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty. The Interior Assistant Not Available. Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealer. message appears. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicles with rear bench seat: as soon as the center rear seat is occupied, the rear seat functions are not supported. The Interior Assistant in rear is currently unavailable, see operator's manual message appears. MBUX multimedia system 307 To use the Interior Assistant in the rear passenger compartment, keep the center rear seat free. Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive) Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning. R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated (/ page 255). R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient lighting or ambient lighting. R The cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the front doors. The rear camera activates the rear doors. % Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252). The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle. As soon as a vehicle occupant moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are issued: R The active ambient lighting or ambient lighting flashes red. R The warning lamp in the outside mirror also flashes red for one of the front doors. R When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds. R R % The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened. % Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 252) and on ambient lighting (/ page 168). R Switching the reading light and search light and on or off Requirements R For the reading light: the cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the reading light for driver and front passenger. The rear camera activates the reading light for the left and right rear seat passengers. The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rearview mirror. Rear compartment passengers move their hand at the grab handle in front of the reading lamp. For the search light: the function is available in the vehicle when it is dark. The cameras are switched on: The front camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied front passenger seat. The rear camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied left or right rear seat. The seats covered are unoccupied or a child is sitting in a child restraint system. 308 MBUX multimedia system Switching the reading light on and off Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger Switching the search light on and off Carrying out operation of the reading light for rear occupants # Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside review mirror. Interaction area for activating the search light # or # Move your hand vertically, up and down in front of the reading lamp. The reading light is switched on or off. # To switch on: reach with your hand into the area of an unoccupied seat. The search light is switched on automatically for the vehicle occupants. To switch off: withdraw the hand from the area of the unoccupied seat. The search light is switched off again. MBUX multimedia system 309 Automatic preselection of the outside mirrors (COMFORT/reactive) Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFOTAINMENT/contactless) Requirements The front camera is switched on. Requirements R The front camera is switched on. R At least one favorite has been saved in the favorites list. R The favorite is connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant . R The area for detecting the favorites pose (V pose) is above the center console in front of the central display. R The V pose is held for a brief time. R Until now, to set the outside mirrors the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door. With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natural movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the preselected mirror side lights up. Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror. % Preselection of the outside mirrors using buttons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 172). % The driver camera is also used for this application. The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage program for a seat. % If a favorite has not yet been saved and connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you. Implementation of the V-pose above the stowage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display # Position your hand above the stowage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle finger are spread to form a V. With your other fingers bent inwards. 310 MBUX multimedia system # Briefly hold the V pose. The favorite is called up. Function of the driver camera The driver camera is on the driver display or in the 3D driver display. The driver camera detects the following characteristics: R Head position R Viewing direction R Eyelid closure characteristics R Driver's face % The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is opened with the SmartKey. The current status of the è driver camera is shown in the status line of the central display. % The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. The driver camera must be set up for face detection before use. Teaching-in biometric data (/ page 313). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or scratched. R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. R The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared. Display messages In the following situations display messages may be shown: R The driver camera is inoperative. The camera is faulty. R R The Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual message appears. The driver camera cannot capture the position of your head. The Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. message appears. The view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted. The Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual message appears. The message can appear, for example, in the following cases: The camera's view is obstructed, e.g. due to a scarf or hat being worn. The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared. If hair partially obstructs the eyes, e.g. as with a long fringe. In the event of strong direct sunlight. The driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes if the light-dark contrast is too strong. MBUX multimedia system 311 - When one or both hands are on top of the steering wheel (twelve o'clock position). Notes on care Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 369). Switching the driver camera on or off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent Assistance The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is switched on. # Select On or Off. When the driver camera is switched off or the Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual message appears, the following functions are not available or limited: R The 3D driver's display (/ page 286) R The MBUX augmented reality head-up display (only for stereo camera)(/ page 288) R The microsleep and distraction detection of ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 226) R R The facial recognition This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user profile and protected applications (/ page 313). The mirror preselection This function allows the natural movement of the head to the left or right to automatically preselect the outside mirror to be adjusted (/ page 172). Information on users, suggestions and favorites & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: # a) Pressing the warning message on the central display. or # b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. User profiles and user-specific content Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me PIN. R You have agreed to the terms of use. R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. 312 MBUX multimedia system % If one of the requirements listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users. User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occupants in the rear passenger compartment can log in as Mercedes me users from their seats. The Multiseat Profile Management allows three profiles to be used simultaneously. A user profile can only be activated simultaneously on one display. % Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and are displayed in all user profiles, e.g. ambient lighting and the current navigation settings. These initially belong to the driver, but can also be changed by the other vehicle occupants in their user profile. You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal. User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used. % The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off. % When a user profile is activated, the following personalized comfort systems, for example, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: R Seat R Ambient light R Outside mirrors R Blinds R Climate control settings If the user profile is activated when driving, the driver's seat position will not be adjusted. Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example: R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list) R Suggestions and favorites Suggestions The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music preferences. The requirements for that are the selection of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total. MBUX multimedia system 313 Configuring users, suggestions and favorites Requirements R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f 5 Change User Adding a user # Select f Add User. A QR code is loaded. # Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device. # Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically. If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user selection. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection. Protecting user-specific content and applications If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applications are protected, for example: R User selection and user profile settings R Biometric sensors The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protected. R Suggestions The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, R R radio stations, contacts and messages are protected. ENERGIZING COACH The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected. Mercedes me connect store The purchase of services is protected. Switch Protect Content on or off. Switch Access Protection on or off. % When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be viewed from any seat and changes can be made. % Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis. # # Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taughtin, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system. # Select Protect Content. # Select Facial Recognition, Fingerprint Recognition or Voice Recognition. 314 MBUX multimedia system % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system. Authenticating using face recognition Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's seat belt. # Look at the driver's display for about five seconds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver's display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan. # Authenticating using fingerprints Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen (/ page 294). The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with your finger print. # Authenticating using voice recognition Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the voice assistant's instructions. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile. % Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition. # Deleting biometric data # Tap on E , for example, behind Facial Recognition. # Select Yes. Teaching in the vehicle key for profile selection # Select Protect Content. # Select SmartKey Recognition. # Have the key ready and follow the set-up assistant's prompts. The user profile is linked to the selected key. If you open the vehicle with the key, the light, mirror and seat settings for your user profile are pre-activated. The key you are currently using for unlocking is used. The key is only stored for the driver and for one user profile. Selecting a user % When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Press Tap Here to Cancel message on the central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. # Select Change User. # Select a user. # When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated. % If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded. MBUX multimedia system 315 Configuring and deleting suggestions # Select ©. # Select Settings. # Select System. # Select Suggestions. # Select Z. # Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalized suggestions based on your user behavior will be offered to you on the zero layer. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone numbers dialed as well as suggestions based on your music preferences. # To delete collected suggestions: select Î. # Select Yes. The suggestions are reset. Adding favorites from categories # Select ©. # Select ß. # Select r. # # # Select W Create New Favorite. Select the category. Select a favorite. Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose # Select ©. # Select ß. # Select r. # Select Driver or Passenger. # Select the category. # Select a favorite. System settings Overview of the system settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements: R Display Display brightness R Control elements Keyboard language and handwriting recognition Sensitivity of the Touch Control Haptic operation for the touchscreen MBUX Voice Assistant MBUX Interior Assistant Sound Entertainment Navigation and traffic announcements Telephone Voice amplification Data protection Connectivity Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC MBUX rear passenger compartment tablet child safety lock Time & date Language Units for distance System PIN - R R R R R R R R R R 316 MBUX multimedia system R R R Suggestions Software update System reset Overview of software updates Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available. If the Automatic Online Update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time. Carrying out a software update: R You can start software updates via the communication module. R You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi hotspot. R You can start map updates from an external medium. % Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP. % If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the connection is successfully established the browser will open in order to start the update. Follow the instructions in the browser in order to start the download. % To complete software updates via the communication module, the vehicle must be connected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account. % To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external WiFi hotspot. A software update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded software update R Activation of the downloaded software update % It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update. % While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted. % Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off. For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation. There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked. Availability of the driver's and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display MBUX multimedia system 317 and driver's display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running: % The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed. In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started. Failure of the driver's display If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately (/ page 449). Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedesbenz.com Failure of the central display If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirements R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system and the communication device to be connected. R The communication device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % Some functions may first need to be activated on the communication device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. 318 MBUX multimedia system # Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices. When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data pack- age option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot # Select MBUX Hotspot. # Select one of the following connection options. Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using NFC # Activate NFC on the device to be connected. # # When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX Hotspot menu, hold the device to be connected to the NFC interface. Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using a security key # Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry. Generating a new security key # Select the Generate New Security Key option in the MBUX Hotspot menu. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. MBUX multimedia system 319 % When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being reestablished, the new security key must be entered. Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) % This function is country-dependent. # Select the Manage Internet Access option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu. % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Search for Access. # Select the network. # Log in to the Wi-Fi network. or # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol. % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot. System language ▌Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. ▌Setting the language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Language 5 System Setting the system language A list of the available system languages is shown. # Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language. Resetting the multimedia system (reset function) & WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the rear view camera, are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. R Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example: R Connected devices R Individual user profiles R Biometric data 320 MBUX multimedia system R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection % The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted. % Vehicles with rear telephony: the handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset. # Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset. % Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car. AMG TRACK PACE Function of AMG TRACK PACE % This function is an on-demand feature and can be activated via Mercedes me after you purchase your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual contains further information on Mercedes me and on-demand features. With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be analyzed and optimized. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hockenheimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for every track. These can be analyzed and compared with other lap times to achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking procedures can be measured and stored. Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public traffic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environmental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application. Setting Track Race Multimedia system: 4 TRACK PACE 5 Track Race Recording a new track # # Select New Track . Select Ì Start Record. at the desired starting point. The track recording starts at this point. During track recording, sectors can be set to divide up the track. # ö Select Set Sector. # Select É Stop Recording to end track recording or cross the starting line again. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. # Select the weather. % The temperature is determined automatically. # Enter a name. # Press a to confirm. The track is saved under the name entered. MBUX multimedia system 321 Searching by track name # Select ª Search . # Enter the track name. Tracks with the searched name are displayed. Measuring time on a saved track # # # # # # # # Select All tracks. Select the desired track. Select u. Select Start Time Recording if you are already at the starting line. or Select Navigate to for navigation to the starting line. Timing begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed. % When ¨ is selected, the track display can be switched to AR. In addition, it is possible to switch to the telemetry display by selecting ò. # Select ð Stop timekeeping to end timekeeping. Confirm the prompt with OK. Select the weather. Select Yes to save the times driven for this track. Showing readings during Track Race The following readings can be shown: R Tire temperature R Miniature map R Sector overview R Engine data R G-force display R Lap overview # # By selecting ¨ on the active display, you can deactivate this. Displaying the analysis # # # Select ï Start Time Recording . # Select Drag the desired display from the grid on the left or right edge of the central display. The readings are shown during the Track Race. . # Select All tracks. An overview of all the driven tracks appears. Select a track. Select a session. The following data are displayed: R Lap and sector times R Average and top speed R Driver R Vehicle R Date R Weather Select Add Recording to use a different session as a reference value. 322 MBUX multimedia system # # # Select % to return to the overview. Select Diagram. Set the desired parameters. The analysis is displayed. 1 Lap overview 2 Parameter overview 3 Editing parameters 4 Deleting parameters 5 Adding new parameters % The following values can be set for the parameters, for example: R speed R Longitudinal/lateral acceleration R Steering angle R Engine speed R Engine oil/tire temperature Based on the analysis, you can check and optimize the driving behavior for any position on the track. Exporting tracks (USB) # Select õ Tracks . An overview of all stored tracks appears. # Select the desired track. # Select options u for the desired track. # Select Export Track to…. The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected to the vehicle. Editing tracks and recordings Select õ Tracks . # Select the desired track. # Select options u for the desired track. # Select Rename or Delete. or # Select a track. # Highlight the desired recording. # Select u options. # Select Export to… or Delete. # Setting Drag Race Multimedia system: 4 TRACK PACE 5 Drag Race Measuring acceleration # Select Z Drag race options. # Select Acceleration. # Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been reached. MBUX multimedia system 323 # # Set a target speed. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been reached. Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure. Quarter mile race # Select Z Drag race options. # Select Quarter Mile. # Set a target distance. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been reached. # Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the target distance or a maximum of one mile has been traveled. Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure. Measuring braking # Z Drag Race options # Select Braking. # Set a starting speed or select Automatic. # Start off and begin the measurement. # Brake to a stop. Measurement is incremental, in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h) to a stop. If the braking procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 98 mph (157 km/h), measurement starts as soon as 93 mph (150 km/h ) has been reached Storing and calling up measured values If measurement is completed or canceled, a prompt appears asking whether the measurement should be saved. # Confirm the prompt with OK to save. Calling up saved measurements # ± Select History. # Select Acceleration, Quarter Mile or Braking. # Select a measurement. The desired measurement is displayed in detail. or # Delete a measurement. Calling up the telemetry display Multimedia system: 4 TRACK PACE 5 Telemetry The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display. For example: R Engine speed R Wheel angle R speed R Steering angle # # Set the desired parameters. Set the time. The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the selected time. 324 MBUX multimedia system Configuring AMG TRACK PACE Requirements To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app: R The TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile end device. R The mobile end device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi. Multimedia system: 4 TRACK PACE 5 Z Connect mobile device via the TRACK PACE app The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronize them with stored tracks. # Select TRACK PACE App. # Select Authorize a New Device. # Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected. # # Select Next and confirm the authorization prompt. A four-digit code is shown on the central display. Enter the code on the smartphone. The device is authorized. De-authorizing the mobile device # Select TRACK PACE App. # Select a device. # Confirm the message prompt with Yes. The device is de-authorized. Setting the TRACK PACE display on the head-up display and driver's display # Select IC and HUD Contents. # Activate or deactivate the desired contents. The contents on the head-up display and the driver's display are adapted. % For further information on the Head-up Display (/ page 288). % Further information about the driver's display (/ page 286). Setting acoustic feedback Select Acoustic Feedback. A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown. # Select a setting. # Displaying statistics # Select TRACK PACE Statistics. Statistics on the current user profile are displayed. The following data are displayed: R Driving time R Track driven R Recorded tracks R Recorded Track Races R Laps recorded R Recorded Drag Races R Maximum design speed Activating the ambient light If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on delta time. # Select Ambient Light. MBUX multimedia system 325 # Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the dashcam If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE. # Select Dashcam. # Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate Recording. # You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under Video Overlay Content. Navigation and traffic Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. # Avoid extended observation of the camera image. Navigation overview Digital map & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © # Alternatively, press the © button on the steering wheel on the right (/ page 301). The zero layer with the digital map is displayed. 1 Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active: The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay £ Ends the current route guidance 326 MBUX multimedia system 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route Destination entry Searches for a parking space Map orientation Ä and set map type Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow) Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions Navigation window shows the next driving maneuver (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view) Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving maneuvers with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, toll stations, 3D images at freeway exits, online content . Switches off navigation announcements Ì Switches on navigation announcements The following map orientations 4 are available: 2D and to the north R 2D and direction of travel R R R 3D and direction of travel Map with complete route Navigation module (expanded view) % If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation. The following map types 4 are available: R Daytime display R Night-time display R Satellite map % If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this under https:// mapfeedback.here.com/#/report. Example: route guidance is active 1 Destination 2 Searches for a gas station 3 Switches traffic information display on or off MBUX multimedia system 327 Overview of the toll system % The toll system is optional equipment and is not available in all vehicles. Debiting of toll charges at freeway toll gates is facilitated with an electronic payment system. The toll system uses RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) for data transfer between the control unit and the toll station. The toll system is initially switched off at the factory. The control unit is in the vehicle glove box. In order to be able to use the toll system, it must have been registered by the customer and activated by the service provider: R Activate the toll system in the settings of the MBUX multimedia system or on the control unit. R There are two ways to register and activate: In the Mercedes me App, register the unit identification number of the control unit and activate the toll system. - Alternatively, you can register and activate via the Toll Service app. Activation of the toll system can take up to 48 hours after registration. When the toll system is activated, the automatic detection of the number of vehicle occupants is initially switched off at the factory. The number of vehicle occupants is preset with one person. The following applies for roads on which toll charges are dependent on the number of vehicle occupants: R If the automatic detection of the number of vehicle occupants is switched off, the number of vehicle occupants must be selected manually. This ensures correct toll accounting. R The number of vehicle occupants can be transmitted automatically. In the process, the number of seat belts worn is determined. If the number of detected persons does not correspond with the number of persons actually in the vehicle, the number of persons must be manually selected. The standard setting of one person does not need to be changed for roads which require toll payment regardless of the number of vehicle occupants. The toll system enables the payment of toll charges in many states of the USA. % In Mexico, for example, the toll system can be registered and activated for journeys to the USA. Notes on use R You can only use the toll system once registration and activation are complete. R Drive at the prescribed vehicle speed in the toll lane. R Mercedes-Benz recommends operation using the MBUX multimedia system. Alternatively, this can also be done on the control unit in the glove box. R For safety reasons, entries should be made while the vehicle is stationary. R For further information, please consult the Mercedes me App or an authorized MercedesBenz Center. 328 MBUX multimedia system Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ª For information on how to register and activate the toll system, see the Digital Operator's Manual. Destination entry Requirements R For the online search: There is an Internet connection. Mercedes me connect is available. You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 5 Adopts the search result in the input line and 6 7 8 9 A B C # Example: entering a POI or address 1 Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double arrow 4 Deletes an entry continues the search Deletes the last character entered Hides the keypad Switches to handwriting recognition Starts the MBUX voice assistant Sets the written language Switches to digits and special characters Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Enter the destination in 1. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list. % Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries. % You can enter a destination as a three-word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries. # Hide the keyboard with a. MBUX multimedia system 329 Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated. % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 294). # Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance 4 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination 5 Address of the intermediate destination After selection of a destination the route is be calculated. # Select one of the options. Calling up alternative routes # Select Routes. # Select an alternative route. Starting route guidance (there is no route yet) # Select ¥ Let's Go!. Detailed display with a route (example) 1 Calls up alternative routes 2 Adds an intermediate destination to the route and recalculates the route 3 Sets intermediate destination as new destina- tion and calculates new route Calling up the detailed display with destination address # Pull the bar between 2 and 3 upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example ratings and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed. 330 MBUX multimedia system # # # # To share a destination: select Ç Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code. To save a destination as a favorite: select ß Favorite and then an option. To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www. To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call. Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destination shown # Select In The Vicinity. # Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI . Selecting a route type In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z (/ page 325). # Select Route. The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. Traffic # announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Traffic r. % Trailer mode and online routes are not available in all countries and for all vehicles. Calculating alternative routes # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select View. # Activate Route Overview after Start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. Selecting alternative routes % If Route Overview after Start has been switched on and a route has been calculated, the function is available. # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Alternative Routes. # When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in the navigation window by swiping to the right or left. # Select Start. Activating a commuter route % A user profile has been created and Allow Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options (/ page 313). Route guidance is not active. # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select Route. # Activate Activate Commuter Route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. # To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or ¨. Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. highways or ferries # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select Route. # Select Avoid Options. MBUX multimedia system 331 # Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Activating route guidance with augmented reality # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate or deactivate Augmented Reality Video. The camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning maneuver. The video image includes additional information. Showing property information for route guidance with augmented reality Road guidance with augmented reality is activated. # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Center . Selecting map orientation Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The map orientations changes in this order: R The 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R The 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R The 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R The map shows the complete route. # Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © Increasing map scale When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display. or # Move two fingers apart on the central display. # Decreasing map scale Tap with two fingers on the central display. or # Move two fingers together on the central display. # Moving the map When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central display. # Using services Requirements R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. 332 MBUX multimedia system R R R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © Showing traffic information In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z (/ page 325). # Select View. # Activate Traffic. # Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing Traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route. # The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute. Displaying hazard warnings If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option. # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z (/ page 325). # Activate or deactivate Traffic Incidents. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning. The following hazards may be shown on the map: R Accidents and breakdowns R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain R Hazards reported manually R Vehicle with active hazard warning light R R Roadworks Additional hazards (if available) Displaying online map contents In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z. # Select View. # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols. # Parking service * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. MBUX multimedia system 333 # # # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers. Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area. # Always observe the local information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # In the navigation module (expanded view), select Z and switch on Parking. # Tap on j the map. or # # # In the route overview, select j Parking Spaces. Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near Destination and Parking Garages. The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings. Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the parking garage/parking lot For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need # for observation of the actual circumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 329). Notes on the dashcam * NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations and data protection provisions You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending 334 MBUX multimedia system on the country in which the dashcam is operated. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use. # Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements. % Observe the following notes for safe operation: R Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage media. R Use USB-IF certified USB storage media. The USB-IF is a non-profit society and stands for USB Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, the USBIF certifies e.g. USB versions, corresponding cables and plugs as well as methods for supplying energy via the USB interface. R Frequent and continuous high-speed overwriting can damage the USB storage media. Mercedes-Benz recommends a high-quality external SSD drive. The abbreviation SSD stands for solidstate drive. % The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example. When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification. % The following functions are available in the Gallery app: R Switching write protection on or off R Deleting video files Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system . Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB symbol. # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system. R The vehicle is switched on. MBUX multimedia system 335 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 334). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts. # To select a recording mode: select Loop Recording or Individual Recording. Loop Recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the oldest file. Individual Recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten. # To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording. % In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies. A report may appear in the following cases: R Individual Recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R If the country border indication has been switched on. R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is displayed. Telephone Telephony ▌Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. 336 MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 140) Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the following Bluetooth® profiles, the full range of features is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. R MAP (Message Access Profile) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. R HFP (hands-free profile) Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system. R SAP (SIM Access Profile) The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile radio unit. MBUX multimedia system 337 For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice®. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. ▌Telephone menu overview 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 338 MBUX multimedia system 5 6 7 8 9 Options Messages Calls up devices Numerical pad Starts contact search ▌Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®. R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with both mobile phones. ▌Connecting a mobile phone Requirements R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Devices - R 5 Z 5 Devices Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device. Connecting a mobile phone Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone. # ▌Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accepting a call k End Call Answering a call with a message i Conference Accepting or rejecting a waiting call Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Deleting favorites Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message - R MBUX multimedia system 339 Mercedes me Apps Mercedes me calls ▌Making a call via the overhead control panel # Press me button 1. Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call ▌Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 339). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from MercedesBenz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 341). ▌Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center using the multimedia system Requirements R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. 340 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 © # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the display. Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz customer center. ▌Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident management: R The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551). R The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882). R The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54). R The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect. If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. The message informs you about the potentially affected area of the vehicle and the strength of the collision. In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds. % The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 343). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the breakdown and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls (/ page 347). MBUX multimedia system 341 % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. ▌Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Call Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider. R The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient. ▌Data transferred during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. % The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R The service selected in the voice control system. 342 MBUX multimedia system Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activated, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: R Current vehicle location Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz customer center. Take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the MercedesBenz customer center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes me connect ▌Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services. You can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 339). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 339). MBUX multimedia system 343 Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 346). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com ▌Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management % Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country. The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 346) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 340) In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system. Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency 344 MBUX multimedia system number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 346). More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com ▌Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice control system R The activated Mercedes me connect services You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated. You can call up the menu using Apps in the multimedia system. In the Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account R Deleting a connection between a user account Mercedes me and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability Web browser overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Previous website Next website Update URL Adds/removes bookmarks Options Settings MBUX multimedia system 345 % Under Ä you have the following options: R Tabs R Bookmarks & History R Reading Mode R Share Link R Share Content R Request Mobile Website % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Overview of Smartphone Integration With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connec- tion. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration: R Apple CarPlay® (wireless connection via Bluetooth® also possible) R Android Auto (wireless connection via Bluetooth® also possible) % For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake. You can start Smartphone Integration using the Devices menu. You can end Smartphone Integration via the Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connection via the device manager or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 319). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged 346 MBUX multimedia system R R R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving Day/night mode of the driver's display Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction The mobile phone uses this data to improve the accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving through a tunnel. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (“eCall”). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that follows. To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle’s communication module. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me connect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. MBUX multimedia system 347 Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedesbenz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, air bag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty. You can recognize a malfunction in the emergency call system by the following displays: R A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display. R The SOS button lights up red continuously. Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # or To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 339). 348 MBUX multimedia system To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX Voice Assistant. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. # If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress button for several seconds. Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred meters before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people detected in the vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be determined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. MBUX multimedia system 349 Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu Symbol Designation Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. R 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. Ä Additional options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. 350 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files MBUX multimedia system 351 Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu Symbol Designation Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Settings Select to have further options shown. The setting options are country-dependent. HD HD radio™ Select to switch the HD Radio™ function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. 352 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favorites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favorite. 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. MBUX multimedia system 353 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm program for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seamlessly 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. R R R Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements R There is a user account at https:// www.mercedes.me. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 354 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting up satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current subscription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the live program. Activating messages for a category # Select a category and activate D. Adding messages for a category Select a category and add a message W. # Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dialog window. The message is set for the activated O track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt # MBUX multimedia system 355 appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Deleting messages in a category # Select a category, mark the desired messages and delete E. or # Do not mark any messages and delete all entries E. Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standard sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume - Automatic adjustment 356 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button G on the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date Notes on special service requirements Driver's display: 4 Service The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the G back button on the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the driver's display (/ page 286). The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service intervals. # Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Maintenance and care 357 In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. If subject to increased stress, check the tires more. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 356). Maintenance Management Notes about Maintenance Management If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer center. The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http:// www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. % The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer center via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system. % Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country. Data transferred when using Maintenance Management When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". % Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Telediagnosis Notes about Telediagnosis % This service is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnosis service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are 358 Maintenance and care detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer center depending on the fault detected. The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http:// www.mercedes.me. For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz customer center. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer center for assistance. % The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence. % Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer center and the service partners. MercedesBenz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment. Data transferred when using Telediagnostics When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". % The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times. Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of movement. Maintenance and care 359 & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the hood: # # # # Switch off the vehicle. Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewelery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Fuel injectors R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood. 360 Maintenance and care Opening the hood Closing the hood * NOTE Damage to the hood If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents. # Do not close the hood manually. # # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. Driver's display: 4 Service The engine oil level is shown. One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display: R Engine Oil Level Measuring Now…: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet. # R Engine oil # # Pull on handle 1 twice. The hood will be released and open slightly. Then lift the hood by hand. ▌Checking the engine oil level using the driver's display Requirements R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed. Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the engine oil level is correct. R Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min": # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Maintenance and care 361 R # R # R Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max": Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. For Engine Oil Level Switch on Vehicle Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavailable # Close the hood. # ▌Refilling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. Do not use additives. * NOTE Damage caused by adding too much engine oil Excessive engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed in a qualified specialist workshop. 362 Maintenance and care % Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. % Depending on the engine, the cap may be located in different positions in the engine compartment. # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Refill engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 360). Checking the coolant level & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # # # # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. Open the cap slowly to release pressure. Have the coolant checked or refilled only at a qualified specialist workshop. Topping up the windshield washer system & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the hood: # Switch off the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Maintenance and care 363 # # Keeping the air/water duct free Remove jewelery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. # & WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves. & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle Remove cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield washer fluid (/ page 435). # # The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. 364 Maintenance and care * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing. # In a car wash. * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. # # Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The 360° Camera is switched off. R The vehicle is locked and the door handles are retracted. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R R R The key is at a minimum distance of 20 ft (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open unintentionally. For car washes with a conveyor system: Neutral i is engaged. The vehicle is locked from the inside. Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control panel or deactivate (/ page 304) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX interior assistant. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper blades, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 12 mph (20 km/h) (/ page 365). Maintenance and care 365 When car wash mode is activated, the Automatic Car Wash Mode Active message will appear on the driver's display. The following adjustments will be made: R The outside mirrors will be folded in. R To prevent the windshield washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated. R The comfort doors will be deactivated. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated. R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds. R Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by the % symbol next to the respective setting. Pressing Switch Off will cancel car wash mode. Above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), car wash mode will be deactivated automatically. You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 365). The following settings will be reset when car wash mode is deactivated: R The outside mirrors will be folded out. R The rain sensor will be activated. R The comfort doors will be activated. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting. R Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image will be deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). R Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated. Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode Requirements The vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle is switched on. R Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving Activating automatic car wash mode Select Automatic Car Wash Mode. # Select Activate. # If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is shown by an % next to the respective setting. % For an overview of the settings made when activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 363). Deactivating automatic car wash mode Select Switch Off. The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automatically deactivated as soon as a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) is exceeded. # 366 Maintenance and care Information on using a power washer & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a power washer: R The key is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative films: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) R R between the film-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around while cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions. Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminates or louvers. Washing the vehicle by hand * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays). Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 368). # # Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Maintenance and care 367 R R R R R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. Tar stains: use tar remover. Wax: use silicone remover. Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Have film attached to the bumper only at a qualified specialist workshop. Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Matt finish Use only care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Have film attached to the bumper only at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Use only car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use any car wash program with a final hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products or gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R In the event of paintwork damage: Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 220). R R R R Notes on cleaning decorative films Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care" (/ page 366). They also apply to matte decorative films. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz). R Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Avoiding damage to the decorative film R The service life and color of decorative films are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature (e.g. hot air blower) Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface. 368 Maintenance and care R Do not treat matte or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed. % Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center). Notes on care of car parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts: Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads will warm up and dry out. Windows * NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components. # Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible. # Immediately absorb any excess fluids. R R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows. Maintenance and care 369 % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or glare spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the windshield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 220). Wiper blades Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 171). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. R % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often. Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). R Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 220). R When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). 360° Camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 267). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care: Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Switch off the display and let it cool down. R 370 Maintenance and care R R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFTLCD). Do not use any other agents. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. R Head-up display R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Plastic trim Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim. Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA Real wood and trim elements Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R * NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # R R R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish. Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. Genuine leather seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers. R For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R Maintenance and care 371 % Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change. Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging damage and thus significantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolor the leather. DINAMICA seat covers Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Fabric seat covers R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfiber cloth and a 1% R R soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. EASY-PACK trunk box R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. 372 Breakdown assistance Replace the safety vest in the following cases: the reflective strips are damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed R the maximum number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded Emergency Removing the safety vest R The safety vests are located in stowage spaces in the front door. Warning triangle ▌Removing the warning triangle Take the safety vest 1 bag out of stowage space. # Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest. % Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door stowage spaces. # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean This is a class 2 vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled in the following cases: R the safety vest is the correct size R the safety vest is fully closed whilst being worn Breakdown assistance 373 # # Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it. Remove warning triangle 2. First-aid kit (soft sided) ▌Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the righthand side of the trunk and is secured with Velcro strip 2. # # Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper pressstud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. Flat tire Notes on flat tires & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire A flat tire severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires). In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 374). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 375). 374 Breakdown assistance R R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 339). All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 418). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. R R R R R # Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: # Banging noise Vehicle vibration Smoke which smells like rubber Continuous ESP® intervention Cracks in the tire side walls tion with an activated tire pressure monitoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. However, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure. Breakdown assistance 375 TIREFIT kit storage location Depending on the vehicle equipment, the storage bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk or in the storage net on the left. Comply with the loading guidelines (/ page 140). Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflator compressor are ready for use (/ page 375). R TIREFIT sticker is present. R Gloves are present. TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 375) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), especially in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures as low as -4°F (-20°C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the tire (larger than damage previously mentioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. * NOTE Overheating due to the tire inflation compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. 376 Breakdown assistance Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a qualified specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects that have entered the tire. # # # # # # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. # # Pull plug 6 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 4 of tire sealant bottle 3 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 3 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compressor. # # Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 6 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch 1. The tire will be inflated. First, tire sealant will be pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/ 73 psi). Breakdown assistance 377 Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when you unscrew the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being achieved If the specified tire pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking characteristics as well as the driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a tire sealed with tire sealant. * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. 378 Breakdown assistance + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. # # # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Breakdown assistance 379 Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R R Further information on ABS (/ page 222) Further information on ESP®(/ page 223) # For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. # All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery # & WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not lean over the battery. Do not inhale battery gases. Keep children away from the battery. Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. 380 Breakdown assistance Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when you are handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately. Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (/ page 220, 219). R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on the 48 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # # R R In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 222) Further information on ESP®(/ page 223) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Breakdown assistance 381 + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 48 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly. The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot. Wear safety glasses. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor immediately. Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way. Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not disconnect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Do not attempt to open the battery. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Non-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode (/ page 220, 219). Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery due to overvoltage When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. 382 Breakdown assistance # Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery due to overvoltage When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery. # # # # # # Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described. During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity. During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mixture of explosive gases A mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting. # # # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Do not stand over the battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance. If the indicator/warning lamps on the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting char- Breakdown assistance 383 acteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Use only undamaged jumper cable / charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable / charging cable R R R R is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point. The jumper cable / charging cable must not come into contact with any parts that may move when the engine is running. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Keep away from fire and naked flames. Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Use only battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may be provided only using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with gasoline engines: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Preparing for starting assistance / the charging process # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Switch off the vehicle and all electrical consumers. # Open the hood. 384 Breakdown assistance Starting assistance # # # using the jumper cable. Start with the donor vehicle first. Start the engine of your own vehicle. Let the engines run for several minutes. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window defroster or the lighting. When starting assistance has finished: First, remove the jumper cable from the ground point of your own vehicle and the negative terminal of the second battery, then remove the jumper cable from the POSITIVE contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first. # Close protective cover 2 of POSITIVE contact 3 and close cover 1. # # # Open cover 1. Slide protective cover 2 of POSITIVE contact 3 on the jump-start connection point in the direction of the arrow. # # # Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicles with the jumper cable. Start with your own vehicle first. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idle speed. Connect the negative terminal of the second battery to ground point of your vehicle 4 Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance 385 Charging the 12 V battery # Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicle and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first. # Connect the NEGATIVE contact of the charger and ground point 4 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first. # Start the charging process. When the charging process is complete: # Remove the charging cable from ground point 4 on the vehicle and the NEGATIVE contact of the charger first and then from the POSITIVE contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first. # Close protective cover 2 of POSITIVE contact 3 and close cover 1. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 379). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery that meets the specific vehicle requirements. The vehicle is equipped with a battery using AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is guaranteed only with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, MercedesBenz recommends that you use only batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. R Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way. Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid) * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: # During towing. # In a car wash. 386 Breakdown assistance Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems (/ page 285). Vehicles with rear wheel drive Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground Permitted towing methods # Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) # * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly Front axle raised No Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock # Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. 4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods. Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed: R the vehicle cannot be started. R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R The transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j % If the transmission cannot be shifted to position i or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported (/ page 388). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation. Breakdown assistance 387 * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 428). # Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the transmission will otherwise automatically shift to j. # Install the towing eye (/ page 390). # Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar # # # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism . Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate tow-away alarm (/ page 110). # # # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 246). Shift the transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched off. R The brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. 388 Breakdown assistance * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport Requirements The vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle is switched off. R The driver's display is in the initial state with no menus open (/ page 286). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible. R The 12 V battery is charged. R # Select vehicle transport. % The noise certification mode is intended exclusively for the technical test organization. It restricts the drive power of the vehicle and must not be used in customer operation. If necessary, set the system language (/ page 319). # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 386). # Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. # Switch on the power supply (/ page 190). # Shift the transmission to position i. % The transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 383). # # # If required, raise the vehicle to transport level again. A vehicle that cannot be raised to transport level may not be loaded or unloaded using a ramp. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level. If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle Not Ready for Loading message is displayed, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded. & WARNING Risk of accident due to activated transport level If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driving and driving safety systems have only limited availability and the view from the vehicle is restricted. Breakdown assistance 389 Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident! # Do not use transport level in normal road operation. # Only activate and use transport level to load the vehicle and when not on public roads. # Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehicle. # # Swipe downward to select Transport Level and press a. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle raising... Do not drive onto ramp yet message is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be canceled with the G button. When raising, do not switch off the vehicle. While the vehicle is being raised, you can maneuver at a maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). % If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will continue to be shown even after a restart. Operation of the driver's display is restricted. When the vehicle is at transport level, it is lowered again in the following situations: R When driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h). R The 12 V battery is discharged. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level. Transporting the vehicle # Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Switch off the vehicle and the power supply. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Raising the vehicle to transport level # Press the G button for at least five seconds. # Immediately press and hold the a button for at least one second. The For Transport Level Switch On Vehicle message is displayed. # Switch on the vehicle(/ page 191). The transport settings are displayed. # Before loading the vehicle, wait until the transport level has been reached and the Transport Level status is shown. 390 Breakdown assistance 4MATIC vehicles Lowering the vehicle after unloading Switch on the power supply. # Start the vehicle. # In Transport Settings, swipe up to select the Standard Level and press a. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level and the Lowering Vehicle… message is displayed. # After the vehicle has been lowered, press the G button for at least two seconds. Transport Settings closes. # # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle. Unloading the vehicle # Make sure that the vehicle is raised to transport level before unloading. Towing eye storage location Towing eye 1 is located under the trunk floor. Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in the boot. Installing and removing the towing eye Breakdown assistance 391 # # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. After removing the towing eye, snap cover 1 into the bumper. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) * NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the automatic transmission. # Do not tow-start the vehicle. # Do not tow-start the vehicle. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted. # Use only fuses approved for MercedesBenz with the respective specified fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found on the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle document wallet. * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. 392 Breakdown assistance # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The vehicle is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes: R Fuse box on the driver's side of the engine compartment (/ page 392) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 394) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 394) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 394) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 391). R Have the following tools readily available: a dry cloth a screwdriver with an appropriate head Opening % Depending on the vehicle equipment, access to the fuse box may be limited. MercedesBenz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood. # # Release the rotary catches on cover 1 and pull the cover up and out. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Breakdown assistance 393 # Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component 2 on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw 3 and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection. # # If present, release hoses 5 from the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body. If present, release hoses 4 from the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body. # # Unscrew screws 6 and fold out bar 7. Unscrew screws 8 and remove fuse box lid 9 to the side. Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid 9. # Place lid 9 on the fuse box and tighten screws 8. 394 Breakdown assistance # # # # # Fold back bar 7 and tighten screws 6. If present, engage hoses 5 in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body. If present, engage hoses 4 in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body. If present, insert electrical component 2 into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws 3. Insert cover 1 and engage the rotary catches. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 391). Fuse box 1 is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. # Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Requirements R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 391). # Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 391). Breakdown assistance 395 # Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow. 396 Wheels and tires Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) R # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 398). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Wheels and tires 397 Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly installed snow chains If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front wheels. # Only install snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 259). R Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are installed, only drive with snow chain mode active (/ page 397). % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 224). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y # Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode. When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were installed. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited and the turning circle is thus increased. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active. 398 Wheels and tires Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires pose in particular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. # R R R Comply with the recommended tire pressures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regularly: Monthly When the load changes Before embarking on a longer journey R # If operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving R Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. R Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: Tire defects as a result of overheating R R Impaired handling characteristics Irregular wear Increased fuel consumption & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage R Wheels and tires 399 & WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tires The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and loading information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 403). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 399). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 409). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display (/ page 402). The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by MercedesBenz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. 400 Wheels and tires The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are valid for cold tires under various operating conditions according to the load and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. Checking the tire pressure manually Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the tire and loading information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. # Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recommended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398) R Tire pressure table (/ page 399) # Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 410). R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 403) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 409) Wheels and tires 401 R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 403) Tire pressure monitoring system ▌Function of the tire pressure monitor & DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. # The system checks the tire pressure and the temperature of the tires fitted to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and tire temperature appear in the driver's display. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 495) or the h warning lamp in the driver's display (/ page 518). The tire pressure monitor is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. 402 Wheels and tires In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tire pressure monitor manually (/ page 402). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R Malfunction caused by another radio signal source One of the following displays appears: Current tire pressure of each wheel: R ▌Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system R ▌Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system Requirements R The vehicle is switched on. Driver's display: 4 © 5 Service # Press a to confirm. ally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 398). % The values displayed in the driver's display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indicated by a tire pressure gauge is higher than that shown in the driver's display. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398) R # Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes.: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values of each tire are displayed as soon as they are known to the system. Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored. Compare the current tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 399). Addition- Requirements The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 398). R Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly fitted. Wheels and tires 403 Driver's display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's display. # Select Yes and confirm the restart with a. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message is shown in the driver's display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If the tire pressure levels are not within the specified range, the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398) Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information placard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloaded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteristics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard 404 Wheels and tires R R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 428). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pressure table (/ page 399). % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. Further related subjects: Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 404) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398). R Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Wheels and tires 405 # (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailerhitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate. Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the maximum load (/ page 405) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 403) R Tire pressure table (/ page 399) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 428) # Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 403). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 406 Wheels and tires Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Wheels and tires 407 Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 410) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 410) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three performance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 409) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 409) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) times as 408 Wheels and tires well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inadequate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Temperature grade & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. Wheels and tires 409 % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 414). R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). Information on the maximum tire load Specifications for maximum tire pressure % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's tire and loading information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (/ page 403). % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 specified for the tire. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 399). 410 Wheels and tires Information on tire characteristics Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First letter(s) Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires 411 First letter(s) 1: Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. R Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R": radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias radial tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum loadbearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1,356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the tire and loading information placard (/ page 403) R Maximum tire load (/ page 409) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) 412 Wheels and tires Index Speed rating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the maximum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+Si" for winter tires. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: R No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or reinforced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard Wheels and tires 413 to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is printed on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted on the vehicle at the factory. The tire and information placard contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, any accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be printed on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. 414 Wheels and tires Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: the pressure inside the tire which applies an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tire dimensions If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with ones that fulfill the specifications of the original part. Wheels and tires 415 For wheels, pay attention to the following: Designation R Type R For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage caused by non-approved tire types and sizes For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tires only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retreaded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. 416 Wheels and tires # # # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully. Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. Avoid particularly high curbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tires. # Only park on as level a surface as possible. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tire-installing tools Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: There are electronic component parts in the wheel. If tire-installing tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged. # Tire-installing tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. # Always have tires change at a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use i M+S tires. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R R Legal stipulations Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. # Use i M+S tires at outside temperatures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). # Only use the tires for their intended purpose. Wheels and tires 417 Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size (left and right) on each axle. It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45°F (7°C) use winter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R R R R R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tire which is installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398) R R R R Tire and loading information placard (/ page 403) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 410) Tire pressure table (/ page 399) Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 424) Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 414) 418 Wheels and tires The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tire-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 on the trunk floor. % Depending on the equipment, the tool bag may be in other positions on the trunk floor. % When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured. The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. Wheels and tires 419 R R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. The required tire-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the normal vehicle level (/ page 259). # Switch off the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # Remove the hub cap if necessary (/ page 419). # Raise the vehicle (/ page 419). Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps To install: Follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Requirements R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 418). # Aluminum hub cap Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 418). R The hub caps have been removed (/ page 419). Important notes on using the jack: Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. R To remove: # Position socket 2 from the tire-change tool kit on hub cap 1. # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. 420 Wheels and tires R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point. # Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands and/or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid. Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely. Position of the jack support points & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. Wheels and tires 421 # * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle. # Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose. # # Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 421). Removing a wheel Requirements R The vehicle is raised. Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1. Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. * NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. # Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. 422 Wheels and tires * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. # Remove the wheel. Installing a new wheel Requirements R The wheel to be changed is removed and the alignment bolt is screwed in (/ page 421). & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel # # Screw centering pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 414). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing. * NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. # Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Wheels and tires 423 # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 414). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the first wheel bolt. # # # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 423). Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 422). * NOTE Risk of vehicle jack becoming trapped by the AIRMATIC system If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. # Start the engine. This adapts the vehicle level. # Remove the jack from under the vehicle. # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise. # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. 424 Wheels and tires # # # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 402). Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work- shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk. Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not install the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel. R Specified tightening torque: 96 lb-ft (130 Nm) R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. % The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tires 425 % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 398) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 403) R Tire pressure table (/ page 399) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 414) R Installing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 418) 426 Technical data Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios ▌Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the lowreflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. Technical data 427 retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. ▌Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table: Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Vehicles without panoramic sliding sunroof 1 Rear roof area Installing an antenna is not permitted on vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when Maximum transmission output 2–m– frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W Frequency band Maximum transmission output 70–cm– frequency band 430 - 470 MHz 35 W Two-way radio 2G 2W Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G 0.5 W The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G) 428 Technical data There are no restrictions regarding the position of the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: R TETRA R 2G/3G/4G/5G Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate Radio regulations Regulatory radio identification and specific notes Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Gross vehicle weight rating Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) Technical data 429 Never exceed the gross vehicle weight rating or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Additional plates VIN in the engine compartment 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Gross vehicle weight rating Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The gross vehicle weight rating is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) 1 Plate with information about emissions test- ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Engine number (stamped onto the crankcase) 430 Technical data Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids & WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids Operating fluids can be toxic. # When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers. # Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. # Always keep children away from operating fluids. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant R Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating fluids: R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://operatingfluids.mercedesbenz.com R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. Technical data 431 If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R premium-grade unleaded gasoline R E85 fuel R a mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade unleaded gasoline Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Fuel ▌Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulfur, it may produce unpleasant odors. % Vehicles with gasoline engine M256: when using 91 AKI/95 RON, there may be slight limitations in performance that have no further consequences. 432 Technical data Refuel using only fuel that has at least the octane number specified on the information label on the fuel filler flap (/ page 209). For maximum engine output: refuel using only premium-grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular gasoline with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. * NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair longevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline with 87 AKI/91 RON: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and top up as soon as possible with unleaded premium grade gasoline. # # Do not drive at the maximum speed. Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower octane number. Further information on fuel is available at the following locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) ▌Information on additives in gasoline (vehicles with gasoline engine) Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brandname fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank. ▌Tank content and fuel reserve Total fuel tank capacity Model Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC 20.1 gal (76.0 liters) Technical data 433 Fuel tank reserve * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives Model Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC 2.1 gal (8.0 liters) # # Engine oil ▌Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. ▌Engine oil quality and filling capacity Engine oil specifications Model MB-Freigabe or MBApproval Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC 229.52 229.61* Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC 229.52* * recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes) To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC: only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 viscosity class engine oils. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. 434 Technical data Engine oil filling capacity Model Capacity Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters) Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC 10.6 US qt (10.0 liters) Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant ▌Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1 At https://operatingfluids.mercedesbenz.com R At a qualified specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz. Technical data 435 # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C)) ▌Coolant filling capacity Coolant Model Capacity Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC 16.1 US qt (15.2 liters) Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC 16.9 US qt (16.0 liters) Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windshield washer fluids. Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washing water with windshield washer fluid all year round. Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Refrigerant ▌Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 430). 436 Technical data * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the climate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R‑134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant compressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refrigerant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be carried out only at a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations as well as SAE standard J639 must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control system regarding the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood. Information label (example - USA) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Technical data 437 ▌Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Refrigerant filling capacity Model Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC USA: 27.9 ± 0.4 oz (790 ± 10 g) Canada: Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC USA: 27.9 ± 0.4 oz (790 ± 10 g) Canada: Filling capacity for PAG oil Model Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC USA: 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g) Canada: Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC USA: 3.9 ± 0.4 oz (110 ± 10 g) Canada: Vehicle data Information regarding the vehicle data The vehicle data specified may vary as a result of the following factors: Factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment In addition, the following applies to the specified vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload. R Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 428). Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC Vehicle length 215.3 in (5469 mm) Vehicle width including outside mirrors 83.0 in (2109 mm) Vehicle height 59.5 in (1510 mm) Wheelbase 133.7 in (3396 mm) Turning radius 44.0 ft (13.4 m) 438 Technical data Weights and loads Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Roof load Model Mercedes-Maybach S 580 4MATIC Mercedes-Maybach S 680 4MATIC Maximum roof load Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439 Display messages Introduction ▌Information about display messages Display messages appear on the driver's display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on the central display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button G or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver's display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. ▌Calling up saved display messages Driver's display: 4 Service The Message Memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display. # Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the display: press the G back button. 440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Display messages 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Push rear-left seat belt extender back manually. See Operator's Manual (example) * The corresponding seat belt extender is malfunctioning. # Slide the seat belt extender back into its original position manually. # If the malfunction occurs again, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual * The front passenger air bag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 46). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger air bag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (/ page 46). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 SmartKey Display messages ® Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key ® * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 80). Replace Key Battery ® Key Not Detected (white display message) * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Try to start the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not detected, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 191). # Start the vehicle. 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ® Key Not Detected (red display message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle. If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 191). # The key battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 78). # Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 80). # ® Initializing Key Please Wait * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445 Display messages ® Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Don't Forget Your Key Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the slot for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 191). Lights Display messages : Check Left Low Beam (example) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is malfunctioning. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. 446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual : * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic Driving Lights Inoperative : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. Switch On Headlights : Switch Off Lights * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited * The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 164). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. 448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 165). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard Warning Light Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449 Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message will be shown every time the engine is started. & WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. If the driver's display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 316). # Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual * The brightness of the head-up display is reduced. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Faulty exterior brightness signals # # Switch on the windshield wipers. Clean the windshield if necessary. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Ù Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may become wider. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line. # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453 Display messages Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind. Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly. Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes. # If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop. 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages C M Hood Unlatched Pull Lever Again to Open Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. * The hood is not fully unlocked. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # M Hood Not Locked Close Before Starting Trip To open the hood fully, pull the handle again (/ page 358). * The hood is not locked. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # Close the hood (/ page 358). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455 Display messages M Stop Immediately Close Hood Completely Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The hood is not locked. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # # M Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Close the hood (/ page 358). * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Close the hood. 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages N Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The trunk lid is open. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # ¥ Close the trunk lid. * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 362). Add Washer Fluid ¥ Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds * Intensive cleaning of the windshield has been activated (/ page 170). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457 Display messages Windshield Wiper Malfunction Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The windshield wiper is malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To Switch Off Vehicle Press and Hold Start/Stop Button for at Least 3 Seconds or Press 3 Times * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (/ page 191). + * The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 362). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # # # # ÿ Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459 Display messages 8 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel Level Low 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Depress Brake to Shift from P * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle. # Change the transmission position. Depress Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Depress Brake to Shift to R * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Service Required Apply Parking Brake to Park * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Parking Brake When Parking * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running or the vehicle switched on. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away When the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deactivated. The vehicle may roll away. # Be ready to brake. # Do not leave the vehicle unattended. # # # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven. % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically. # Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle * The transmission is malfunctioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Drive Overheated Drive Carefully * The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 217). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 217). or Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 217). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on. # To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 217). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery. To apply: Apply the electric parking brake manually. # If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 217). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467 Display messages F (USA only) ! Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 217). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 218). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. (Canada only) Release Parking Brake F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off. # Switch on the vehicle. 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages $ (USA only) J Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the vehicle system. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You cannot start the vehicle system again. (Canada only) Brake Immediately $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Malfunction See Operator's Manual * The brake force boosting function is impaired. The hill start assist may be impaired. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Display messages $ (USA only) J Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be affected. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. (Canada only) Malfunction Stop $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Display messages ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Display messages T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ë Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 225). Off é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 226). # If necessary, take a break. 474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving in compliance with traffic regulations. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Continue driving in compliance with traffic regulations. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. ä * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475 Display messages É STOP Vehicle Level Too Low Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: No faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # * NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # # # É Vehicle Rising Please Wait Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 259). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised. * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. 476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ¢ Drive at Max. 12mph É Compressor Is Cooling E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The current level is too high. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # No faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # # # # Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements. Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph Reduce speed considerably before taking a curve. Avoid sudden steering movements. * At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is deactivated. * NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. # # # # # # ä Malfunction Stop Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully. Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve. Avoid sudden steering movements. Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system. The system is deactivated. 478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly. # # # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231). - - - mph ç Suspended * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 228). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479 Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 231). Off Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 228). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on carefully. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on carefully. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 231). Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 242). Drive on carefully. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on carefully. or # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 236). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist Inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 236). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. 482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more. Ø * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 236). # Put your hands on the steering wheel. Initiating Emergency Stop Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 238). Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 238). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 239). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 228). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. 484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 252). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 255). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Keeping Assist Limited Range of Functions See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ¸ ð ç Ó Temporarily Unavailable Sensors Dirty Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes are: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 220). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487 Display messages á ð Ó ¬ ç Ô Camera View Reduced See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes are: R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular. % This mist on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 220). # Restart the vehicle. 488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes: R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera’s field of vision. R The driver camera is dirty. # # Keep the driver camera's field of vision free. Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display (/ page 369). Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. * The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight. # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen. The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight after 30 minutes. The display message will no longer appear if you confirm the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the entire journey. Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The driver camera is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE PLUS Inoperative See Operator's Manual * There is a malfunction in the PRE‑SAFE® PLUS system. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking assistance systems Display messages PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist Limited Availability of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist’s maneuvering assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 368). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Display messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491 Battery Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (/ page 383). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. # * The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required 492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # # # # # # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The vehicle is off and the condition of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Drive for 30–60 mins. or # Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 383). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493 Display messages # Stop Vehicle To Charge the 12 V Battery Do Not Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Leave the vehicle running # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Switch off the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Û * The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out. Û Battery Overheated Stop! Everyone Get Out! Outdoors if Possible % Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. # Do not continue driving. # If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire. 494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Starting Possible Again display message will be shown on the driver's display. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Starting Possible Again display message does not appear after a few minutes: Try to start the vehicle. # If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Starting Possible Again Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (/ page 383). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensor are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative Tire Pressure Sensors Missing * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. é * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheel Sensor(s) Missing é Check Tires * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # é Please Correct Tire Pressure é Warning Tire Malfunction Check the tire pressure (/ page 398) and the tires. * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 402). * The pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R R The tires can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires. Notes on flat tires (/ page 373). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # 498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # é Tires Overheated é Reduce Speed Check the tires. * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499 Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level At Next Refueling (Add 1 Quart) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 361). Notes on engine oil (/ page 433). 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level * The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. * The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. 500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 361). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 433). 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle * The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # # # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501 Display messages 5 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Driver's display Driver's display with driver camera Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey. Indicator and warning lamps Occupant safety 6 Restraint system (/ page 503) 502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps ü Seat belt (/ page 503) Vehicle Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 504) Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 504) Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) (/ page 504) Ù Rear axle steering (red) (/ page 504) Engine ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 506) ; Engine diagnosis (/ page 506) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 506) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator (/ page 506) Braking ! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 510) F USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 510) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 510) é USA: Recuperative Brake System (/ page 510) J Canada: brakes (yellow)(/ page 510) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 510) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 510) Driving and driving safety systems ! ABS (/ page 513) ÷ ESP® (/ page 513) å ESP® OFF (/ page 513) Û ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 513) L Distance warning (/ page 513) Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 513) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 513) Æ Active Brake Assist (/ page 513) ä AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (/ page 513) Mercedes-Benz emergency call system H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 517) Tire pressure monitoring system h Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 518) Exterior lighting T Standing lights (/ page 158) L Low beam headlamps (/ page 158) K High beam headlamps (/ page 159) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 159) R Rear fog light (/ page 158) Symbols on the central display É Drive Away Assist (/ page 279) L Rear cross traffic warning (/ page 280) º Maneuvering brake function (/ page 281) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503 Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44). Restraint system warning lamp & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # # ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the driver's display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 44). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 44). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Power steering warning lamp (yellow) Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Ù Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Note the messages on the driver's display. * The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow) Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (red) * The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Note the messages on the driver's display. 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Warning/indicator lamp ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes are: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Note the messages on the driver's display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes are: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; * The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Check Engine warning lamp # * The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Electrical malfunction warning lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Warning/indicator lamp é RBS warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning. Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ * The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. Possible causes are: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Brakes warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (Canada only) # Note the messages on the driver's display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513 Driving and driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver's display. ABS warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes * The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 223). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. 514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver's display. ESP® warning lamp lights up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. å ESP® OFF warning lamp * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Û Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 223). * The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit. ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp L Distance warning lamp * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). 516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Ó Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Active Brake Assist warning lamp ê Active Brake Assist warning lamp Æ Active Brake Assist warning lamp ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow) * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process. Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). * The yellow AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. # Note the messages on the driver's display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517 Warning/indicator lamp ä Suspension warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. * NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly. # # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Note the messages on the driver's display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Warning/indicator lamp H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. 520 Index 1, 2, 3 ... (SmartKey) battery......................................... 80 3D driver's display, 3D instrument cluster Function/notes...................................... 286 4MATIC........................................................ 209 48 V on-board electrical system Displays in the driver's display................ 292 Operating safety...................................... 29 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (operating unit)....................................................... 178 Switching on/off (MBUX)....................... 179 ABS............................................................. 222 Acceleration Kickdown............................................... 208 Optimized acceleration.......................... 194 Accident prevention..................................... 279 Accident, emergency call............................. 346 Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal...................................... 79 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Brake application................................... Exit warning........................................... Function................................................ Active Brake Assist Function................................................ Setting................................................... Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Activating/deactivating.......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Active Lane Change Assist..................... Calling up a speed................................. Function................................................ Increases/decreases the speed............. Route-based speed adaptation............... Storing a speed...................................... Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... Active headlamps......................................... Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Function................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 255 254 252 252 242 246 231 238 239 231 228 231 234 231 238 161 242 239 257 Function................................................ Setting the sensitivity............................. Active light function..................................... Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function.................... Cross traffic warning.............................. Drive Away Assist................................... Exiting a parking space.......................... Function................................................ Maneuvering brake function................... Memory Parking Assist.......................... Parking.................................................. Pausing.................................................. Remote Parking Assist........................... Active Service System PLUS......................... Active Speed Limit Assist............................. Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... Active Emergency Stop Assist................ Active Lane Change Assist..................... Function................................................ Active Stop-and-Go Assist............................ Adaptive cruise control................................. 255 257 161 275 280 279 274 270 281 282 272 274 275 356 233 238 238 239 236 235 234 Index 521 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.......................... 165 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating.......................... 167 Additives Engine oil............................................... 433 Fuel....................................................... 432 After-sales service........................................ 356 Air bag Belt air bag.............................................. 59 Cushion bag............................................. 60 Front air bag............................................ 60 Inflating................................................... 53 Overview.................................................. 60 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp........ 46 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps........ 48 Warning lamp........................................... 44 Air conditioning menu Air distribution....................................... 179 Calling up.............................................. 178 Climate control...................................... 179 Footwell temperature............................. 180 Fragrance system.................................. 181 Front air conditioning............................. 178 Ionization............................................... 181 Rear passenger compartment climate control................................................... 180 Air distribution Adjusting....................................... 176, 179 Air freshener system.................................... 181 Air inlet........................................................ 363 Air pressure................................................. 398 Air suspension............................................. 258 Air vents Adjusting............................................... 186 Glove box............................................... 188 Air/water duct............................................. 363 Airbag Rear airbag.............................................. 60 Airflow Adjusting............................................... 176 AIRMATIC Setting the vehicle level......................... 259 Vehicle levels......................................... 258 Alarm system............................................... 109 All-wheel drive.............................................. 209 Alternative route.......................................... 329 Ambient lighting........................................... 168 AMG TRACK PACE Configuring............................................ 324 Drag Race.............................................. 322 Function................................................ 320 Telemetry display................................... 323 Track Race............................................. 320 Animals.......................................................... 55 Anti-collision Drive Away Assist................................... 279 Anti-lock braking system.............................. 222 Anti-theft alarm system................................ 109 Anti-theft protection Immobilizer............................................ 109 Apps, Mercedes me Mercedes me calls................................. 339 Mercedes me connect........................... 342 Assistance system....................................... 221 ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods................ 357 Service interval display.......................... 356 Service requirements............................. 356 522 Index ATA Deactivating the alarm........................... 110 Function................................................ 109 Interior protection.................................. 111 Interior protection function..................... 110 Tow-away alarm function........................ 110 Tow-away protection.............................. 110 ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 226 Setting................................................... 228 Attention assistant....................................... 226 Augmented reality Head-up display..................................... 289 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center..... 33 Authorized workshop...................................... 33 Automatic car wash...................................... 363 Automatic car wash mode............................ 365 Automatic climate control............................ 179 Automatic distance control........................... 228 Automatic driving lights................................ 159 Automatic emergency call............................ 347 Automatic engine start/stop........................ 198 Automatic front passenger air bag shutoff Function.................................................. 49 Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat)......................... 68 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp........ 46 Automatic lateral support adjustment........... 128 Automatic measures after an accident............ 53 Automatic mirror folding function................. 175 Automatic seat adjustment........................... 127 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 205 Drive programs...................................... 202 DYNAMIC SELECT button....................... 202 Engages neutral..................................... 206 Engaging drive position.......................... 207 Engaging reverse gear............................ 206 Kickdown............................................... 208 Manual gear shifting............................... 207 Selecting park position........................... 206 Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 207 Switching gears..................................... 205 Transmission position display................. 205 Transmission positions........................... 205 Autonomous braking.................................... 242 B Bad weather light......................................... 162 Bag hook..................................................... 147 BAS............................................................. 223 Basic information........................................... 41 Battery (12 V battery) Charging................................................ 383 Notes..................................................... 379 Notes (starting assistance and charging)........................................................ 381 Replacing............................................... 385 Starting assistance................................ 383 Battery (48 V) Notes..................................................... 380 Battery (starter battery) charging, Remote Online........................ 192 Belt Fastening................................................. 44 Notes on wearing correctly...................... 43 Releasing................................................. 60 To adjust the height................................. 44 Belt air bag Function.................................................. 59 Index 523 Inflating................................................... 53 Straightening out a seat belt strap............ 59 Blind Spot Assist.......................................... 254 Bluetooth® Connecting a mobile phone.................... 338 Brake Assist Active Brake Assist................................. 242 Brake Assist System............................... 223 Brake Assist System..................................... 223 Brake disks.................................................. 193 Brake fluid.................................................... 434 Brake force distribution................................ 225 Brake pads................................................... 193 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 222 Active Brake Assist................................. 242 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 223 Driving tips............................................ 194 EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)....................................................... 225 Electric parking brake............ 216, 217, 218 Handbrake............................. 216, 217, 218 HOLD function....................................... 225 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 194 New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 193 Notes on breaking in a new vehicle........ 193 Parking brake......................... 216, 217, 218 Post-collision brake.................................. 53 Braking assistance Brake Assist System............................... 223 Breakdown Changing a wheel................................... 418 Flat tire.................................................. 373 Overview of aids...................................... 22 Tow-starting........................................... 391 Towing methods..................................... 386 Transporting the vehicle......................... 388 Breakdown (Roadside Assistance).................. 28 C Calling the customer center for Mercedes-Benz............................................ Calls Mercedes me......................................... Telephone menu.................................... Using overhead control panel................. 339 339 338 339 Camera 360° camera......................................... 263 Activating using GPS (reversing camera)........................................................ 267 Button................................................... 266 Cleaning................................................ 368 Driver camera........................................ 310 Function................................................ 263 Information............................................ 220 Managing activation points..................... 267 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. 267 ROAD SURFACE SCAN........................... 261 Select view............................................ 267 Car key.......................................................... 78 Car wash Automatic car wash............................... 363 Power washer........................................ 366 Washing by hand.................................... 366 Car-to-X-Communication Display on map...................................... 331 Care Air/water duct....................................... 363 Automatic car wash............................... 363 524 Index Camera.................................................. 368 Car parts............................................... 368 Decorative foil........................................ 367 Display................................................... 369 Exterior lighting...................................... 368 Head-up display..................................... 369 Headliner............................................... 369 Paint...................................................... 366 Plastic trim............................................ 369 Power washer........................................ 366 Real wood/trim elements...................... 369 Seat belts.............................................. 369 Steering wheel....................................... 369 Vehicle interior....................................... 369 Washing by hand.................................... 366 Wheels/rims.......................................... 368 Caring for plastic trim................................... 369 Caring for rims............................................. 368 Central display Operating.............................................. 301 Central locking system Button..................................................... 83 SmartKey................................................. 79 Change of address......................................... 29 Change of ownership...................................... 29 Changing a wheel Installing a new wheel............................ 422 Preparation............................................ 418 Raising the vehicle................................. 419 Removing/installing hub caps................ 419 Charging 12 V battery........................................... 383 USB port........................................ 142, 151 Wirelessly charging a mobile phone........ 154 Chauffeur mode Moving the front passenger seat into the chauffeur position............................ 120 Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position................................ 122 Overview................................................ 119 Checking the coolant level........................... 362 Child safety lock Rear door................................................. 75 Side windows (rear passenger compartment)................................................ 77 Child seat Adjusting the vehicle seat........................ 70 Basic instructions.................................... 64 Front passenger seat............................... 67 Installing ISOFIX....................................... 73 Notes on belt air bags.............................. 70 Overview of warning stickers.................... 67 Rear airbag.............................................. 69 Rearward-facing....................................... 70 Risks/dangers......................................... 65 Securing on the rear seat with the seat belt.................................................. 75 Securing to the front passenger seat with the seat belt..................................... 75 The most important information in brief.... 63 Top Tether................................................ 74 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 65 Basic instructions.................................... 64 Special seat belt retractor........................ 72 Chock.......................................................... 418 City lighting.................................................. 162 Clean varnish............................................... 366 Cleaning Air/water duct....................................... 363 Automatic car wash............................... 363 Car parts............................................... 368 Index 525 Decorative foil........................................ Paint...................................................... Power washer........................................ Real wood/trim elements...................... Sensors................................................. Vehicle interior....................................... Washing by hand.................................... Cleaning carpets.......................................... Cleaning seat covers.................................... Climate control Activating/deactivating.......................... Activating/deactivating (rear operating unit)................................................. Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)................................. Adjusting............................................... Air conditioning menu............................ Air distribution....................................... Air vents (front)...................................... Air vents (rear passenger compartment)..................................................... Airflow................................................... Automatic control.................................. Defrosting a window.............................. Defrosting the windshield....................... 367 366 366 369 368 369 366 369 369 178 178 178 178 178 176 186 187 176 179 179 176 Defrosting windows................................ 180 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil................................................... 437 Fine particle status display..................... 178 Fragrance system.......................... 181, 182 Glove box air vent.................................. 188 Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 186 Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system)...................................... 182 Ionization............................................... 181 Notes..................................................... 176 Operating unit........................................ 176 Pre-entry climate control for departure time................................................ 184 Rear operating unit.................................. 20 Rear passenger compartment operating unit.................................................. 177 Rear window defroster........................... 176 Refrigerant............................................. 435 Residual heat......................................... 181 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off................................................... 181 Switching the A/C function on/off (MBUX).................................................. 179 Synchronization function........................ 180 Temperature.......................................... 176 Ventilating with convenience opening..... 100 Windshield heater.................................. 183 COC papers, CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY............................................................... 426 Cockpit Dashboard overview................................... 6 Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting........................................... 218, 219 Combination switch Lights.................................................... 159 Windshield wipers.................................. 170 Commuter route........................................... 329 Components relevant to radio regulation Declaration of conformity......................... 31 Content sharing menu.................................. 300 Control elements:.......................................... 27 Convenience closing.................................... 101 Convenience doors........................................ 86 Convenience opening................................... 100 Coolant Capacity................................................ 435 Notes..................................................... 434 526 Index Cooling........................................................ 176 Copyright License.................................................... 40 Copyrights Trademarks.............................................. 40 Cornering light............................................. 161 Correct use.................................................... 33 Cover........................................................... 102 Cross traffic (warning).................................. 280 Crosswind Assist.......................................... 224 Cushion air bag (reclining rear seat) Inflating................................................... 53 Cushion bag, Reclining rear passenger compartment seat.......................................... 60 Cushionbag Information.............................................. 61 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)................ 34 Customer Relations Department..................... 34 D Damage Limited protection.................................... 55 Damping system ADS PLUS AIRMATIC.............................................. 258 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL..................... 260 Dashboard Cockpit overview....................................... 6 Dashcam Notes..................................................... 333 Selecting a USB device.......................... 334 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 334 Data processing in the vehicle........................ 36 Data protection rights.................................... 39 Data storage Data protection rights.............................. 39 Electronic control units............................ 36 Event Data Recorder................................ 39 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 39 Online services........................................ 38 Daytime running lamps, Daytime running lamp mode Activating/deactivating.......................... 167 Deactivating the alarm................................. 110 Dealership..................................................... 33 Declaration of conformity Components relevant to radio regulation.. 31 Decorative foil.............................................. 367 Definitions Tires and loading.................................... 412 Defrost function........................................... 179 Deployed components Limited protection.................................... 55 Deployment situations.................................... 53 Destination entry......................................... 328 Diagnostics connection.................................. 32 DIGITAL LIGHT Activating/deactivating.......................... 163 Active headlamps................................... 161 Assistance functions.............................. 163 Bad weather light................................... 162 City lighting............................................ 162 Cornering light....................................... 161 Enhanced fog light function.................... 162 Highway mode....................................... 162 Intelligent Light System.......................... 161 Overview................................................ 161 Topographical compensation.................. 162 Index 527 Digital Operator's Manual............................... 24 Dinghy towing Pulling/towing....................................... 285 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission.......................... 205 Engages neutral..................................... 206 Engaging drive position.......................... 207 Engaging park position automatically...... 206 Engaging reverse gear............................ 206 Function................................................ 205 Gearshift recommendation..................... 208 Manual gearshifting................................ 207 Selecting park position........................... 206 Display Care...................................................... 369 Display (driver's display) Overview of displays............................... 292 Display (MBUX multimedia system) Settings................................................. 291 Display message Calling up on driver display..................... 439 Notes..................................................... 439 Display messages ç - - - mph....................................... # 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required............................. Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. ¥ Add Washer Fluid......................... é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... : Automatic Driving Lights Inoperative................................................... Û Battery Overheated Stop! Everyone Get Out! Outdoors if Possible.. $ Brake Immediately....................... á Camera View Reduced See Operator's Manual................................. $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual......................................... 478 491 494 456 473 446 493 468 487 469 457 5 Check Engine Oil Level At Next Refueling (Add 1 Quart).......................... : Check Left Low Beam (example).. é Check Tires................................. É Compressor Is Cooling................. ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle... ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. ® Don't Forget Your Key.................. ¢ Drive at Max. 12mph................... 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level...................................................... 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle............................................. 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle.................................. 499 445 496 476 458 470 471 445 476 501 499 499 500 528 Index 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open..................... 8 Fuel Level Low............................. M Hood Not Locked Close Before Starting Trip........................................... M Hood Unlatched Pull Lever Again to Open........................................ ® Initializing Key Please Wait........... Ø Initiating Emergency Stop............. ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. G Inoperative.................................. ¥ Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds........................................... 440 459 459 454 454 444 482 471 472 473 490 456 ® Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 444 ® Key Not Detected (white display message)........................................ 443 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)............. 440 ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph............................................... 474, 477 $ Malfunction See Operator's Manual.................................................. 468 : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual.................................................. 446 $ Malfunction Stop......................... 469 ä Malfunction Stop......................... 477 ® Obtain a New Key........................ 443 ç Off............................................... 479 ë Off............................................... 473 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 464 é Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 497 Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery…..................................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning....................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required.................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately................................... é Reduce Speed............................. F Release Parking Brake.................. ® Replace Key Battery..................... 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required.................................... Ù Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required..................... Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.... Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual....... 494 452 452 453 498 467 443 440 451 451 451 Index 529 M Stop Immediately Close Hood Completely............................................ É STOP Vehicle Level Too Low......... # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. Û Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. # Stop Vehicle To Charge the 12 V Battery Do Not Switch Off Vehicle....... ç Suspended.................................. : Switch Off Lights.......................... : Switch On Headlights................... # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery........................................... F Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake................................... ¸ Temporarily Unavailable Sensors Dirty............................................... é Tires Overheated.......................... 455 475 492 493 493 478 446 446 492 467 486 498 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting................. É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ é Warning Tire Malfunction............. é Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative........ Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual..... Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual.......................... Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Distance Assist Inoperative.......... Active Distance Assist Now Available...... Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 450 475 497 496 484 484 480 480 479 479 480 482 Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative...................................................... Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative... Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... Active Lane Keeping Assist Limited Range of Functions See Operator's Manual.................................................. Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual........................................... Active Parking Assist Limited Availability of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual................................. Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops........................................... 482 483 483 485 485 485 490 490 482 530 Index Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Steering Assist Inoperative........... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual........ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative................................................... Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative............................................. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message)........................................ 481 481 483 484 447 447 448 448 453 464 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message).................................... 463 Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual.......................................... 491, 494 Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen....................... 488 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 470 Depress Brake to Shift from P................ 459 Depress Brake to Shift to D or R............. 460 Depress Brake to Shift to R.................... 460 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited........... 447 Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer... 463 Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle... 462 Drive Overheated Drive Carefully............ 463 Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual........................................... 488 Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual..................... 488 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................. Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................. Hazard Warning Light Malfunction.......... Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual............ Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Head-up Display Inoperative................... MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited........ N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again............... PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual........................................... Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 441 442 448 450 450 450 447 462 489 445 488 Index 531 PRE-SAFE PLUS Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................. PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................. Push rear-left seat belt extender back manually. See Operator's Manual (example)......................................... Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Parking Brake When Parking................... Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected........ Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P........................................................... Service Required Apply Parking Brake to Park................................................... Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position............................. 489 489 441 462 461 460 461 460 462 Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Stationary................................................... Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded............................................... Starting Possible Again.......................... Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative........... Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative Tire Pressure Sensors Missing...................... To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle.......................................... To Switch Off Vehicle Press and Hold Start/Stop Button for at Least 3 Seconds or Press 3 Times............................ Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual..................... Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative................. Transmission Malfunction Stop............... Windshield Wiper Malfunction................ 459 453 495 495 495 496 460 457 474 474 462 457 Displaying road names/house numbers....... 329 Distance control.......................................... 228 Distance warning......................................... 242 DISTRONIC.................................................. 228 Door Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 75 Closing convenience doors...................... 86 Emergency key......................................... 90 Open comfort doors................................. 86 Opening (from the inside)......................... 83 Power closing function............................. 90 Recessed door handles............................ 83 Setting convenience doors....................... 89 Unlocking (inside).................................... 83 Door control panel (rear passenger compartment)....................................................... 20 Door handles Extending/retracting................................ 83 Door operating unit Function seat........................................... 18 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)............ 408 Drag Race.................................................... 322 Drinking and driving..................................... 194 532 Index Drinks holder, Cup holder............................. 150 Drive Away Assist......................................... 279 Drive position............................................... 207 Drive program display.................................. 203 Drive programs Selecting............................................... 203 Driver camera Function................................................ 310 Switching on/off.................................... 311 Driver's display 48 V on-board electrical system............. 292 Head-up display..................................... 288 Menus................................................... 287 Notes..................................................... 286 Operating.............................................. 286 Service due date.................................... 356 Status displays....................................... 292 Warning/indicator lamps.............. 8, 12, 501 Driver's seat Adjusting electrically.............................. 113 Easy entry and exit feature..................... 133 Seat heating.......................................... 129 Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. Active Brake Assist................................. ATTENTION ASSIST................................ BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot Assist.................................................... Cameras................................................ EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)....................................................... ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)........ Hill Start Assist...................................... HOLD function....................................... Overview................................................ Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. STEER CONTROL................................... Traffic Sign Assist................................... Your responsibility.................................. Driving system............................................. Driving tips Drinking and driving............................... General driving tips................................ Notes on breaking in a new vehicle........ Optimized acceleration.......................... Rear axle steering.................................. 222 242 226 223 252 220 225 223 226 225 221 220 225 246 220 221 194 194 193 193 198 Drowsiness detection................................... 226 Duplicate key................................................. 82 Dynamic handling control system................. 223 DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indicator...................................................... 205 Configuring drive program I............ 203, 204 Displaying engine data........................... 204 Displaying vehicle data........................... 204 Drive program display............................ 203 Drive programs...................................... 202 Function................................................ 202 Selecting the drive program................... 203 E E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Electrohydraulic suspension................... ROAD SURFACE SCAN........................... Setting the vehicle level......................... Suspension............................................ Vehicle levels......................................... E10.............................................................. Easy entry feature Adjusting............................................... 260 261 262 260 260 431 135 Index 533 Easy exit feature Adjusting............................................... EASY-PACK trunk box Care...................................................... Installing/removing................................ Setting................................................... EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution........ ECO Assist 48 V on-board electrical system............. ECO display................................................. ECO start/stop button Automatic engine start/stop.................. ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start........................... Automatic engine stop........................... Function................................................ Switching off/on.................................... Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... Emergency braking................................ Manually applying/releasing.................. Releasing automatically.......................... Electrical fuses............................................. 135 369 149 148 225 200 200 199 198 198 198 199 216 218 217 217 391 Electrohydraulic chassis............................... 260 Electrohydraulic suspension......................... 260 Electronic Stability Program......................... 223 Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... 373 Overview of aids...................................... 22 Reflective safety vest............................. 372 Warning triangle..................................... 373 Emergency braking Active Brake Assist................................. 242 Brake Assist System............................... 223 Carrying out........................................... 218 Electric parking brake/handbrake.......... 216 Emergency key Door........................................................ 90 Trunk lid................................................... 98 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle................................ 191 Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside)............................... 97 Emergency stop assistant............................. 238 Emergency Tensioning Devices Inflating................................................... 53 Engine Emergency operation mode.................... Emergency start..................................... Engine number....................................... Jump-starting......................................... Parking (start/stop button).................... Engine data Displaying.............................................. DYNAMIC SELECT.................................. Engine number............................................. Engine oil Additives................................................ Capacity................................................ Checking the oil level using the driver display................................................... MB-Freigabe / MB-Approval................... Quality................................................... Refilling.................................................. Environmentally friendly driving...................... ESC, Electronic Stability Control................... ESP® Activating/deactivating.......................... Crosswind Assist.................................... Function................................................ 191 391 428 381 212 204 204 428 433 433 360 433 433 361 25 223 224 224 223 534 Index Event Data Recorder...................................... 39 Exit warning MBUX Interior Assistant......................... 307 Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist.............................. 270 Drive Away Assist................................... 279 PARKTRONIC......................................... 267 Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 368 Exterior mirrors Parking position..................................... 174 F Factory settings MBUX reset function.............................. Fatigue detection......................................... Favorites...................................................... Fine particle status display........................... First aid First-aid kit (soft sided).......................... First-aid kit (soft sided)................................. 319 226 313 178 373 373 Fitting accessories Limited protection.................................... 55 Flacon.......................................................... 182 Flat tire Changing a wheel................................... 418 MOExtended.......................................... 374 Notes..................................................... 373 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 375 Flat towing Pulling/towing....................................... 285 Floor mats................................................... 157 Fog lamp...................................................... 159 Fog light (extended range)............................ 162 Foil covering On camera/sensors............................... 220 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 220 Folding table................................................ 143 Footrest Rear front passenger seat...................... 121 Footwell temperature................................... 180 Fragrance.................................................... 181 Fragrance system Activating/deactivating.......................... 181 Adjusting............................................... 182 Inserting/removing the flacon................ 182 Perfume vial........................................... 182 Free software................................................. 40 Frequencies Two-way radio........................................ 427 Front air bag Inflating................................................... 53 Front headlamps.......................................... 158 Front passenger air bag Disabling/enabling.................................. 47 Front passenger air bag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat)......................... 68 Front passenger seat Adjusting electrically.............................. 113 Adjusting from driver's seat.................... 115 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment......................................... 116 Index 535 Fuel Additives................................................ 432 E10........................................................ 431 Gasoline................................................ 431 Gasoline quality..................................... 431 Refilling.................................................. 209 Reserve................................................. 432 Sulfur content........................................ 431 Tank capacity......................................... 432 Fuel consumption indicator.......................... 205 Fuel reserve................................................. 432 Fully reclined position.................................. 118 Function in the event of an accident............... 54 Function seat................................................. 18 Function seat (rear passenger compartment)............................................................. 20 Fuses Cockpit.................................................. 394 Engine compartment.............................. 392 Front passenger footwell........................ 394 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 391 Notes..................................................... 391 Trunk..................................................... 394 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory.............................. 216 Opening/closing a door......................... 216 Problem................................................. 215 Garage door openers Programming buttons............................. 213 Synchronizing the rolling code................ 215 Gasoline...................................................... 431 Gearshift DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 205 Manual.................................................. 207 General driving tips...................................... 194 Genuine parts................................................ 25 Glide mode.................................................. 209 Glove box Air vent.................................................. 188 Locking/unlocking................................. 143 Grab handles Notes..................................................... 112 H Handbrake................................................... Handling characteristics Unusual................................................. HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... Handset....................................................... Hazard warning lights................................... Hazard warnings Car-to-X-Communication........................ Head restraint Attaching/removing the additional cushion (front)....................................... Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear passenger compartment).. Folding into position/folding back manually (rear passenger compartment)..................................................... Lowering/folding into place from the front (rear passenger compartment)....... Luxury head restraint (front)................... Luxury head restraint (rear passenger compartment)........................................ Neck warmer......................................... 216 396 95 144 160 331 124 125 126 124 123 124 125 536 Index Head-up display Augmented reality.................................. Care...................................................... Function................................................ Memory function................................... Operating.............................................. Selecting (with augmented reality).......... Switching on/off.................................... Headlamp flashing........................................ Headlamp range control............................... Headlamps................................................... Heating Activating/deactivating.......................... Center console...................................... Climate control...................................... Panel heating......................................... Rear window.......................................... Seat....................................................... Steering wheel....................................... Windshield............................................. Help call Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. High beam................................................... Highway mode............................................. 289 369 288 136 290 291 291 159 162 158 178 177 176 131 176 129 133 183 346 159 162 Hill Start Assist............................................ HOLD function Function................................................ Switching on/off.................................... Home screen Central display....................................... Hood Opening/closing.................................... 226 225 225 300 358 I Identification plate Engine................................................... 428 Refrigerant............................................. 435 Vehicle.................................................. 428 Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 186 Immobilizer.................................................. 109 Inattentiveness detection............................. 226 Incorrect behavior by vehicle occupants Limited protection.................................... 55 Indicator/warning lamp................................ 501 Indicator/warning lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 46 Individual drive program Configuring.................................... 203, 204 Inside rearview mirror.................................. 173 Installing Snow chains.......................................... 397 Tires/wheels......................................... 422 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating.......................... 163 Active headlamps................................... 161 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 164 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 165 Assistance functions.............................. 163 Bad weather light................................... 162 City lighting............................................ 162 Cornering light....................................... 161 Enhanced fog light function.................... 162 Highway mode....................................... 162 Overview................................................ 161 Topographical compensation.................. 162 Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 168 Ambient lighting..................................... 168 MBUX reading light................................ 307 Switch-off delay time.............................. 170 Index 537 Interior protection........................................ 111 Internet Mercedes me connect........................... 342 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot...................... 317 Web browser.......................................... 344 Ionization..................................................... 181 ISOFIX child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 73 J Jack Storage location..................................... 418 Jump-start connection.................................. 383 K Key Problem................................................... Replacement key...................................... KEYLESS-GO Deactivating............................................. Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. Problem................................................... Unlocking setting..................................... 82 82 80 84 86 79 Kickdown..................................................... 208 Knee air bag................................................... 60 L Lane change assist....................................... 239 Lane Keeping Assist..................................... 255 Lane recognition Active Lane Change Assist..................... 239 Lane recognition (automatic) Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 255 Lane scan.................................................... 261 Language Notes..................................................... 319 Setting................................................... 319 Level control AIRMATIC.............................................. 258 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL..................... 260 License plate (front)....................................... 31 License plate assembly (front)........................ 31 Light switch................................................. 158 Lighting Intelligent Light System.......................... 161 Interior lighting....................................... Lights Active headlamps................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... Assistance functions.............................. Automatic driving lights.......................... Bad weather light................................... City lighting............................................ Combination switch............................... Cornering light....................................... DIGITAL LIGHT....................................... Fog light (extended range)...................... Hazard warning lights............................. High beam............................................. Highway mode....................................... Intelligent Light System.......................... Interior lighting....................................... Locator lighting...................................... Reading lamp......................................... Rear fog light......................................... Responsibility for lighting systems.......... Switch-off delay time.............................. Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off................................................... 168 161 164 165 163 159 162 162 159 161 161 162 160 159 162 161 168 167 168 159 158 167 163 538 Index Topographical compensation.................. 162 Turn signals............................................ 159 Limited Warranty............................................ 35 Live Traffic Information................................. 331 Load index Tires...................................................... 410 Load-bearing capacity Tires...................................................... 410 Loading Bag hook............................................... 147 Definitions............................................. 412 Loading guidelines....................................... 140 Loading information table............................. 403 Loads........................................................... 140 Locator lighting............................................ 167 Locking/unlocking Automatic locking (MMS)......................... 86 Doors (from the inside)............................ 83 Emergency key......................................... 90 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 84 Loud sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Low-beam headlamps Activating/deactivating.......................... Lubricants.................................................... Luggage Net hooks.............................................. Luggage rack............................................... Lumbar support........................................... 158 430 145 140 117 M MAGIC VISION CONTROL Windshield wiper.................................... 171 Maintaining safe distance Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 231 Maintaining the headliner............................. 369 Maintaining the steering wheel..................... 369 Maintenance Vehicle..................................................... 28 Maintenance Management Notes..................................................... 357 Transferred data..................................... 357 Malfunction Restraint system...................................... 44 Malfunction message Driver's display...................................... Maneuvering Drive Away Assist................................... Maneuvering brake function................... Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating.......................... Maneuvering assistant Cross traffic warning.............................. Drive Away Assist................................... Maneuvering brake function................... Maneuvering brake function......................... Maneuvering support................................... Manual gearshifting Activating/deactivating.......................... Map Displaying online map contents.............. Displaying weather information.............. Moving................................................... Selecting the map orientation................ Setting the map scale............................ Map functions.............................................. Massage program........................................ 439 279 281 281 280 279 281 281 280 208 331 331 331 331 331 331 129 Index 539 Massage programs............................... 128, 129 Maximum full-stop braking........................... 223 Maximum load rating.................................... 409 Maximum permissible load Calculation example............................... 405 Determining........................................... 404 Maximum tire pressure................................. 409 MBUX Dashcam............................................... 333 MBUX Interior Assistant Camera & parking.................................. 310 Driver camera........................................ 310 Exit warning........................................... 307 Favorites................................................ 309 Overview................................................ 304 Preselection outside mirrors................... 309 Reading light.......................................... 307 Search light........................................... 307 Using the favorites pose......................... 309 MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode... 220 Air conditioning menu............................ 178 Calling up the Zero Layer........................ 298 Configuring display settings.................... 291 Drive programs.............................. 203, 204 Factory setting....................................... 319 Home screen......................................... 300 Language settings.................................. 303 MBUX Interior Assistant......................... 304 Media.................................................... 349 Memory Park Assist............................... 284 Mercedes me & Apps............................. 344 Notes..................................................... 294 Operating the Zero Layer........................ 298 Overview................................................ 294 Set collision detection.................... 218, 219 Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 235 Snow chain mode.................................. 397 Standby mode function.......................... 219 Steering wheel heater/seat heating....... 133 Telephone.............................................. 335 Touchscreen.......................................... 301 Zero layer.............................................. 295 MBUX reading light...................................... 307 MBUX search light........................................ 307 MBUX voice assistant Function................................................ 303 Voice prompting..................................... 303 Mechanical key Inserting/removing.................................. 80 Media Overview of functions/symbols.............. 349 Medical aids................................................... 34 Memory function Head-up display..................................... 136 Outside mirrors...................................... 136 Seat....................................................... 136 Steering wheel....................................... 136 Memory function (rear passenger compartment) Passenger seat and rear seat................. 138 Rear seat............................................... 137 Memory Parking Assist Exiting a parking space.......................... 284 Function................................................ 282 Parking.................................................. 283 Recording.............................................. 282 Setting................................................... 284 Menus (driver's display) Notes..................................................... 287 Mercedes me App Activating on-demand features................. 28 540 Index Mercedes me Apps...................................... 344 Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment............ 341 Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident/ breakdown detection............................. 340 Calls via the overhead control panel....... 339 Information............................................ 339 Mercedes-Benz customer center............ 339 Transferred data..................................... 341 Mercedes me connect Accident/Breakdown Management........ 343 Information............................................ 342 Transferred data..................................... 344 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call...................... 347 Data transfer......................................... 348 Information............................................ 346 Manual emergency call.......................... 347 Overview................................................ 346 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts......................... 25 Message memory......................................... 439 Mirrors Mirror folding function............................ 175 Outside mirrors...................................... 172 Rearview mirror..................................... 173 Mobile phone Authorizing, Remote Parking Assist......... 278 Notes on wireless charging.................... 154 Wireless charging (front)........................ 155 Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment).................................. 20, 156 Model series................................................ 428 Modification Limited protection.................................... 55 MOExtended tires, Run-flat tires................... 374 MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... 161 Multifunction camera ROAD SURFACE SCAN........................... 261 Multimedia system Enabling/disabling the rear airbag............ 49 N Navigation Activating............................................... 325 Destination entry................................... 328 Notes..................................................... 325 Overview................................................ Neck warmer............................................... Neutral........................................................ Non-operational time Activating/deactivating standby mode... Notes on breaking in a new vehicle............... 325 125 206 220 193 O Objects in the vehicle interior Limited protection.................................... 55 Occupant safety Air bag..................................................... 60 Basic information..................................... 41 Child seat................................................ 64 Information on the child restraint system.......................................................... 49 Information on the correct seat position... 42 Pets in the vehicle.................................... 55 PRE-SAFE®.............................................. 50 On-board diagnostics interface....................... 32 On-board electronics Two-way radios...................................... 426 On-demand feature.................................. 27, 28 Index 541 Online services.............................................. 38 Open Source Software................................... 40 Opening the trunk lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 95 Opening/closing a door............................... 216 Opening/closing a garage door.................... 216 Operating fluids Additives................................................ 432 Brake fluid............................................. 434 coolant.................................................. 434 Engine oil............................................... 433 Gasoline................................................ 431 Notes..................................................... 430 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)...... 435 Windshield washer fluid.......................... 435 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system............... 29 Operator's manual......................................... 26 Operator's Manual digital............................... 24 Outside mirrors Automatic anti-glare mode..................... 173 Automatic mirror folding function........... 175 Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot Assist.................................................... 252 Folding in/out........................................ 172 Memory function................................... 136 Preselection MBUX................................ 309 Setting................................................... 172 Warning lamp......................................... 252 Overhead control panel.................................. 16 Overview of air bags....................................... 60 P Paddle shifters Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 207 Paint code................................................... 428 Panel heating............................................... 131 Panic alarm, Alarm Activating/deactivating............................ 79 Parcel net hooks.......................................... 145 Park position DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 205 Parking Active Parking Assist.............................. 270 PARKTRONIC......................................... 267 Parking Assist Active Parking Assist.............................. Memory Parking Assist.......................... PARKTRONIC......................................... Remote Parking Assist........................... Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating/deactivating.......................... Adjusting warning tones......................... Function................................................ Parking assistance systems Active Parking Assist.............................. Drive Away Assist................................... Maneuvering brake function................... Memory Parking Assist.......................... PARKTRONIC......................................... Remote Parking Assist........................... Parking brake............................................... Parking for an extended period..................... Parking lamps.............................................. Parking lights............................................... Parking position Exterior mirrors...................................... 270 282 267 275 269 270 267 270 279 281 282 267 275 216 219 158 158 174 542 Index Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 174 PARKTRONIC............................................... 267 PASSENGER AIR BAG Status display, front passenger air bag..... 46 Payload Calculation example............................... 405 Determining the maximum..................... 404 Permitted towing methods Overview................................................ 385 Personalization............................................. 311 Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 55 Post-collision brake........................................ 53 Power closing function Door........................................................ 90 Trunk lid................................................... 93 Power supply Start/stop button.................................. 190 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 190 Power washer.............................................. 366 Pre-entry climate control activating/deactivating for departure time....................................................... 185 At time of departure............................... 184 For departure time................................. 185 immediate.............................................. 186 PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection Function.................................................. 50 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Reverting measures................................. 51 PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Function.................................................. 51 Inflating................................................... 53 PRE-SAFE® PLUS Backing up measures............................... 51 Function.................................................. 51 Preventative occupant protection system ................................................................ 50, 51 Profile.......................................................... 311 Programs..................................................... 202 Protection Limited.................................................... 55 Protection against collision Maneuvering brake function................... 281 Protection of the environment Driving style............................................. 25 Pulling away Drive Away Assist................................... 279 Hill Start Assist...................................... 226 Optimized acceleration.......................... 194 Q QR code rescue card...................................... 35 Qualified specialist workshop......................... 33 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors....................... Radio........................................................... Radio regulations Regulatory radio identification................ Rain closing function Sliding sunroof....................................... Rain sensor Sliding sunroof....................................... Windshield wipers.................................. 220 351 428 105 105 170 Index 543 Reading lamp Interior lighting....................................... 168 Rear air bag Inflating................................................... 53 Information.............................................. 61 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps........ 48 Rear airbag Activating/deactivating............................ 49 Rear axle steering........................................ 198 Rear door (child safety lock) Securing.................................................. 75 Rear fog light............................................... 159 Rear passenger compartment climate control......................................................... 180 Rear passenger compartment seat belt Status display.......................................... 45 Rear seat Footrest................................................. 121 Fully reclined position............................ 118 Reclining rear seat................................. 117 REAR SEAT AIR BAG Status display.......................................... 48 Rear view camera Opening the camera cover..................... 267 Rear window Roller sunblind....................................... 107 Rear window defroster.................................. 176 Rear window heating.................................... 176 Rearview mirror Automatic anti-glare mode..................... 173 Rearward-facing child seat Information.............................................. 70 Reflective safety vest.................................... 372 Refrigerant................................................... 435 Refrigerator box Removing/installing............................... 153 Refueling Fuel....................................................... 209 Refueling the vehicle.............................. 209 Remote Online Charging the starter battery................... 192 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 192 Starting the vehicle................................ 192 Remote Parking Assist Authorizing a mobile phone.................... 278 Function................................................ 275 Operating.............................................. 276 Replacement key............................................ 82 Reporting safety defects................................. 34 Reserve Fuel....................................................... 432 Resetting MBUX reset function.............................. 319 Residual heat............................................... 181 Responsibility Driving safety systems........................... 220 Restraint system Basic information..................................... 41 Basic instructions for children.................. 64 Deployment situations.............................. 53 Functionality............................................ 44 Information on function............................ 54 Information on the correct seat position... 42 Limited protection.................................... 55 Malfunction............................................. 44 Protection................................................ 42 Self-test................................................... 44 544 Index Warning lamp........................................... 44 Reverse gear DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 205 Reversing camera Activating via GPS.................................. 267 Managing activation points..................... 267 ROAD SURFACE SCAN................................. 261 Roadside Assistance (breakdown).................. 28 Roll away protection..................................... 225 Roller sunblind Electric.................................................. 107 Rear window.......................................... 107 Sliding sunroof....................................... 102 Roof load..................................................... 438 Route Alternative route.................................... 329 Calculating............................................. 329 Commuter route..................................... 329 Navigation............................................. 325 Selecting a type..................................... 329 Route guidance with augmented reality Activating............................................... 329 Activating/deactivating the traffic light view............................................... Displaying road names/house numbers....................................................... Head-up display..................................... Switching video on or off........................ Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ Setting................................................... Run-flat characteristics................................ S Safety system.............................................. Satellite radio Logging in.............................................. Setting music and sport alerts................ Seat Adjusting electrically.............................. Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment... Automatic adjustment............................ Automatic lateral support adjustment..... Configuring settings............................... Correct driver's seat position................. 249 329 289 329 234 235 374 221 354 354 113 116 127 128 127 112 Footrest (rear passenger compartment)..................................................... 121 Fully reclined position............................ 118 Lumbar support..................................... 117 Massage programs................................. 128 Memory function................................... 136 Neck warmer......................................... 125 Panel heating......................................... 131 Reclining rear seat................................. 117 Resetting settings (massage programs).. 129 Settings................................................... 18 Side impact air bag.................................. 60 Workout programs................................. 128 Seat (rear passenger compartment) Settings................................................... 20 Seat belt Automatic tightening................................ 52 Rear passenger compartment seat belt status display.................................... 45 Straightening out a belt air bag................. 59 Warning lamp........................................... 45 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating............................ 52 Function.................................................. 52 Index 545 Seat belt extender.......................................... 52 Seat belt warning........................................... 45 Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 52 Belt air bag.............................................. 59 Care...................................................... 369 Fastening................................................. 44 Notes on wearing correctly...................... 43 Releasing................................................. 60 Seat belt extender.................................... 52 To adjust the height................................. 44 Seat heating Activating/deactivating.......................... 129 Seat height.................................................. 113 Seat ventilation...................................... 20, 131 Selecting a gear........................................... 207 Selector lever............................................... 205 Self-test Automatic front passenger air bag shu toff.......................................................... 46 Restraint system...................................... 44 Sensors Cleaning................................................ 368 Service........................................................ 356 Service center................................................ 33 Service due date.......................................... 356 Service interval display................................. 356 Shifting Automatic transmission.......................... 207 Gearshift recommendation..................... 208 Manual.................................................. 207 Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 207 Shortening the braking distance Brake Assist System............................... 223 Side impact air bag........................................ 60 Side windows Child safety lock (rear passenger compartment).......................................... 77 Closing with SmartKey........................... 101 Convenience closing.............................. 101 Convenience opening............................. 100 Electric roller sunblind............................ 107 Opening with the SmartKey.................... 100 Opening/closing...................................... 98 Problem................................................. 101 Size designation Tires...................................................... 410 Skid chains.................................................. 397 Sliding sunroof Automatic functions............................... 105 Closing with SmartKey........................... 101 Opening with the SmartKey.................... 100 Opening/closing.................................... 102 Problem................................................. 105 Rain closing function.............................. 105 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal........... 79 Battery..................................................... 80 Deactivating a function............................ 80 Function.................................................. 78 Key ring attachment................................. 80 Mechanical key........................................ 80 Panic alarm.............................................. 79 Power consumption................................. 80 Unlocking setting..................................... 79 Smartphone Integration, iPhone® Android Auto.......................................... 345 Apple CarPlay®...................................... 345 546 Index Snow chain mode......................................... 397 Snow chains................................................ 397 Socket 12 V (rear passenger compartment)....... 151 Software update........................................... 316 SOS button.................................................. 339 Sound Menu..................................................... 355 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 50 Wheels/tires.......................................... 396 Sound settings............................................. 355 Spare parts.................................................... 25 Spare wheel Emergency spare wheel......................... 424 Special seat belt retractor.............................. 72 Specialist workshop....................................... 33 speed Save, cruise control............................... 231 Save, DISTRONIC................................... 231 Speed adaptation, Route-based.................... 234 Speed control Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 228 Speed rating Tires...................................................... Start-off assist Drive Away Assist................................... Hill Start Assist...................................... Optimized acceleration.......................... Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................. Starting the vehicle................................ Switching on the power supply / vehicle......................................................... Start/stop function...................................... Starter battery charging, Remote Online........................ Starting Remote Online....................................... Start/stop button.................................. Starting assistance...................................... Starting the engine Emergency operation mode.................... Remote Online....................................... Start/stop button.................................. 410 279 226 193 212 191 190 198 192 192 191 383 191 192 191 Starting-off aid Drive Away Assist................................... 279 Hill Start Assist...................................... 226 Optimized acceleration.......................... 193 Status display Front passenger air bag............................ 46 Rear passenger compartment seat belt.... 45 Status display, rear air bag............................. 48 Steer Assist Active Steering Assist............................. 236 STEER CONTROL................................... 225 STEER CONTROL......................................... 225 Steering Rear axle steering.................................. 198 Steering wheel Adjusting electrically.............................. 132 Driver's air bag........................................ 60 Memory function................................... 136 Steering wheel heater............................ 133 Steering wheel adjustments......................... 132 Steering wheel heater Linking to seat heating........................... 133 Steering wheel paddle shifters...................... 207 Index 547 Stop and go ECO start/stop function........................ 199 Stopping Parking the vehicle................................. 212 Stowage areas............................................. 142 Stowage compartment Parcel net hooks.................................... 145 Stowage space Handset (rear passenger compartment)..................................................... 144 Stowage spaces Armrest................................................. 142 Center console (front)............................ 142 Door...................................................... 142 Glove box............................................... 142 Substances hazardous to health..................... 29 Sulfur content.............................................. 431 Suspension Adjusting the vehicle level (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)................................... 262 AIRMATIC.............................................. 258 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL..................... 260 Setting the suspension level (AIRMATIC)................................................... Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. Interior................................................... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off....... System settings MBUX reset function.............................. Overview................................................ T Tank capacity Fuel....................................................... Reserve................................................. Tank filler cap / flap..................................... Technical data Information............................................ Radio regulations................................... Roof load............................................... Vehicle dimensions................................ Telediagnosis Diagnostic data...................................... 259 167 170 181 319 315 432 432 209 426 428 438 437 357 Telediagnostics Transferred data..................................... Telemetry display......................................... Telephone Authorizing a mobile phone, Remote Parking Assist........................................ Bluetooth®............................................. Connecting a mobile phone.................... Menu..................................................... Notes..................................................... Notes on wireless charging (mobile phone)................................................... Operating modes................................... Secure Simple Pairing............................ Telephone menu overview...................... Wireless charging (mobile phone, rear passenger compartment)....................... Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone, front)..................................................... Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® telephony............................. Temperature Adjusting............................................... Temperature grade....................................... 358 323 278 338 338 338 335 154 338 338 337 156 155 338 176 407 548 Index THERMOTRONIC Air conditioning control panel................. Through-loading feature Locking.................................................. Opening................................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number).................... Tire and Loading Information placard............ Tire characteristics....................................... Tire information table................................... Tire labeling Characteristics....................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity............................ Maximum tire load................................. Maximum tire pressure.......................... Size designation..................................... Speed rating.......................................... Temperature grade................................. Tire Quality Grading............................... Traction grade........................................ Tread wear grade................................... Tire pressure Checking............................................... 176 147 145 408 403 410 403 410 408 410 410 409 409 410 410 407 407 407 407 402 Checking manually................................. Maximum............................................... Tire pressure table................................. TIREFIT kit.............................................. Tire pressure monitor Function................................................ Tire pressure monitoring system Restarting.............................................. Tire pressure table....................................... Tire Quality Grading...................................... Tire sealant.................................................. Tire tread..................................................... Tire-change tool........................................... Tire-change tool kit Overview................................................ TIREFIT kit, Tire inflation compressor Storage location..................................... Tires Breakdown............................................. Characteristics....................................... Checking............................................... Checking the temperature...................... Checking the tire pressure manually....... 400 409 399 375 401 402 399 407 375 396 418 418 375 373 410 396 402 400 Definitions............................................. 412 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 408 Installing................................................ 422 Labeling................................................. 407 Load index............................................. 410 Load-bearing capacity............................ 410 Maximum pressure................................ 409 Maximum tire load................................. 409 MOExtended.......................................... 374 Noise..................................................... 396 Notes on installing................................. 414 Removing............................................... 421 Removing/installing hub cap.................. 419 Replacing....................................... 414, 418 Rotating................................................. 417 Selection............................................... 414 Size designation..................................... 410 Snow chains.......................................... 397 Speed rating.......................................... 410 Storing................................................... 418 Temperature grade................................. 407 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 403 Tire pressure table................................. 399 Tire Quality Grading............................... 407 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 375 Traction grade........................................ 407 Index 549 Tread wear grade................................... 407 Unusual handling characteristics............ 396 Toll system Debiting toll fees.................................... 325 Windshield............................................. 175 Top Tether...................................................... 74 Topographical compensation, Predictive headlamp range control............................... 162 Touch Control Driver's display...................................... 286 MBUX.................................................... 301 Touch-sensitive controls................................. 27 Touchscreen................................................ 301 Tow bar system Towing away.......................................... 285 Tow-away protection.................................... 110 Tow-starting................................................. 391 Towing Towing methods..................................... 385 Towing eye installing/removing................................ 390 Storage location..................................... 390 Towing methods Both axles on the ground....................... Overview................................................ Track Race................................................... Traction grade.............................................. Traffic information........................................ Traffic Jam Assistant..................................... Traffic light data service Display in the driver's display................. Traffic light view Activating/deactivating.......................... Information............................................ Traffic light data service......................... Traffic light warning/display......................... Traffic Sign Assist Function................................................ Setting................................................... Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing..................... Transmission position display....................... Transmission positions DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 386 385 320 407 331 235 250 249 249 250 246 246 249 285 205 205 Transporting Vehicle.................................................. 388 Tread wear grade......................................... 407 Trunk Installing/removing the EASY-PACK comfort box........................................... 149 Setting the EASY-PACK comfort box....... 148 Trunk lid Closing.................................................... 93 Emergency release (from inside)............... 97 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 95 Limiter..................................................... 98 Opening................................................... 92 Power closing function............................. 93 Switching the separate locking feature on/off.............................................. 97 Unlocking with emergency key................. 98 TuneIn Internet Radio................................... 353 Turn signal indicator..................................... 159 Turn signals.................................................. 159 Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 427 Installation............................................. 426 Transmission output............................... 427 550 Index U Unfastening................................................... 60 Unlocking setting........................................... 79 Updates....................................................... 316 USB port Rear passenger compartment................ 151 Stowage compartments (front)............... 142 User profiles Adding a user......................................... 313 Note...................................................... 311 Selecting options................................... 313 V Vehicle 48 V on-board electrical system............... 29 Activating, Remote Online...................... 192 Activating/deactivating standby mode... 220 Correct use.............................................. 33 Data storage............................................ 36 Diagnostics connection............................ 32 Emergency key......................................... 90 Equipment............................................... 26 KEYLESS-GO............................................ 84 Limited Warranty...................................... 35 lock automatically (MMS)......................... 86 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 83 Locking/unlocking emergency key........... 90 Lowering................................................ 423 Maintenance............................................ 28 Medical aids............................................ 34 Parking.................................................. 212 Parking for an extended period............... 219 Problem notification................................. 34 Pulling................................................... 285 QR code rescue card............................... 35 Raising................................................... 419 Set collision detection.................... 218, 219 Standby mode function.......................... 219 Starting (start/stop button)................... 191 starting, emergency operation mode...... 191 Stopping................................................ 212 Switching off (start/stop button)............ 212 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 190 Towing away.......................................... 385 Transporting.......................................... 388 ventilating / convenience opening......... 100 Vehicle cameras........................................... 220 Vehicle data Display, MBUX....................................... 204 Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT................ 204 Notes..................................................... 437 Roof load............................................... 438 Turning circle......................................... 437 Vehicle height........................................ 437 Vehicle length........................................ 437 Vehicle width......................................... 437 Wheelbase............................................. 437 Vehicle dimensions...................................... 437 Vehicle emergency start............................... 391 Vehicle equipment......................................... 26 Vehicle identification number....................... 428 Vehicle identification plate Model series.......................................... 428 Paint code............................................. 428 VIN........................................................ 428 Vehicle interior Cooling/heating (Remote Online)........... 192 Vehicle key..................................................... 78 Vehicle level AIRMATIC.............................................. 259 Index 551 Setting (AIRMATIC)................................ 259 Setting (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)....... 262 Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada................................................................ 28 Vehicle sensors............................................ 220 Vehicle start Emergency operation mode.................... 191 Remote Online....................................... 192 Start/stop button.................................. 191 Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit.............................................. 375 Towing eye............................................. 390 Ventilating.................................................... 100 Ventilation................................................... 186 Vents Air vents................................................ 186 VIN Engine compartment.............................. 428 Identification plate................................. 428 Seat....................................................... 428 Vision Defrosting windows................................ 180 Windshield heater.................................. 183 Voice assistant Voice prompting..................................... 303 Voice Control System................................... 303 W Warning system............................................ 109 Warning triangle................................... 372, 373 Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 513 Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... 516 Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp...................................................... 515 J Brakes warning lamp (Canada only)...................................................... 512 $ Brakes warning lamp (USA only)... 512 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)......................................... 511 ; Check Engine warning lamp......... 508 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 506 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)...... 507 L Distance warning lamp................. ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)........................ F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................. ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow).......................................... # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................. H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp............................. Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 515 510 510 510 508 514 513 514 508 509 517 504 552 Index Ù Power steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. 504 é RBS warning lamp (USA only)....... 511 Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (red).............................................. 505 Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow).......................................... 505 6 Restraint system warning lamp..... 503 ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 503 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 504 ä Suspension warning lamp (red).... 517 ä Suspension warning lamp (yellow)....................................................... 516 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes....................... 518 h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up.................... 518 REAR SEAT AIR BAG................................. 48 Warning/indicator lamps Driver's display...................................... 501 PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 46 Washer fluid Topping up............................................. 362 Windshield washer fluid.......................... 435 Washing by hand.......................................... 366 Water tank................................................... 363 Wear Limited protection.................................... 55 Weather information..................................... 331 Web browser................................................ 344 Wedge......................................................... 418 Weight information....................................... 428 Wheel change Lowering the vehicle.............................. 423 Removing a wheel.................................. 421 Wheel rotation............................................. 417 Wheels Breakdown............................................. 373 Care...................................................... 368 Checking............................................... 396 Checking the tire pressure manually....... 400 Checking the tire temperature................ 402 Definitions............................................. 412 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 408 Installing................................................ 422 Load index............................................. 410 Load-bearing capacity............................ 410 Maximum tire load................................. 409 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 409 MOExtended.......................................... 374 Noise..................................................... 396 Notes on installing................................. 414 Removing............................................... 421 Removing/installing hub cap.................. 419 Replacing....................................... 414, 418 Rotating................................................. 417 Selection............................................... 414 Size designation..................................... 410 Snow chains.......................................... 397 Speed rating.......................................... 410 Storing................................................... 418 Temperature grade................................. 407 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 403 Tire characteristics................................ 410 Tire labeling........................................... 407 Tire pressure.......................................... 398 Tire pressure monitor............................. 401 Tire Quality Grading............................... 407 Index 553 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 375 Traction grade........................................ 407 Tread wear grade................................... 407 Unusual handling characteristics............ 396 Wi-Fi Setting up a hotspot............................... 317 Window Rear window.......................................... 107 Roller sunblind....................................... 107 Window curtain air bag................................... 60 Windows Care...................................................... 368 De-icing................................................. 179 Opening/closing...................................... 98 Removing mist....................................... 180 Windshield De-icing................................................. 179 Defrosting.............................................. 176 Infrared reflective................................... 175 Radio waves........................................... 175 Replacing the wiper blades with MAGIC VISION CONTROL....................... 171 Toll system............................................. 175 Windshield heater................................ 176, 183 Windshield washer fluid................................ 435 Windshield washer system............................ 362 Windshield wiper Replacing the wiper blades with MAGIC VISION CONTROL....................... 171 Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating.......................... 170 Winter operation Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... 397 Snow chains.......................................... 397 Wiper blades Care...................................................... 368 Replacing with MAGIC VISION CONTROL..................................................... 171 Wipers......................................................... 170 Wireless charging Mobile phone (front).............................. 155 Mobile phone (rear passenger compartment).............................................. 156 Overview................................................ 154 Workout programs........................................ 128 Workshop....................................................... 33 Z Zero layer Calling up.............................................. Function................................................ Operating.............................................. Overview................................................ 298 295 298 296